daily update
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
CommitLineData
252b5132
RH
1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
56dd11f0 3@c Copyright 1991-2013 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 4@syncodeindex ky cp
dff70155 5@c man begin INCLUDE
252b5132
RH
6@include configdoc.texi
7@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
c428fa83 8@include bfdver.texi
dff70155 9@c man end
252b5132
RH
10
11@c @smallbook
12
ff5dcc92
SC
13@macro gcctabopt{body}
14@code{\body\}
15@end macro
16
0285c67d
NC
17@c man begin NAME
18@ifset man
19@c Configure for the generation of man pages
20@set UsesEnvVars
21@set GENERIC
0285c67d 22@set ARM
ac145307 23@set C6X
49fa1e15 24@set H8300
0285c67d 25@set HPPA
0285c67d 26@set I960
0285c67d 27@set M68HC11
7fb9f789 28@set M68K
833794fc 29@set MIPS
3c3bdf30 30@set MMIX
2469cfa2 31@set MSP430
2a60a7a8
AM
32@set POWERPC
33@set POWERPC64
49fa1e15
AM
34@set Renesas
35@set SPU
36@set TICOFF
2ca22b03 37@set WIN32
e0001a05 38@set XTENSA
0285c67d
NC
39@end ifset
40@c man end
41
9160ea82
AM
42@ifnottex
43@dircategory Software development
44@direntry
252b5132 45* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
9160ea82
AM
46@end direntry
47@end ifnottex
252b5132 48
0e9517a9 49@copying
e49e529d
JM
50This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
51@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
52@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
53@end ifset
54version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 55
56dd11f0 56Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2013 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 57
cf055d54 58Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 59under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
cf055d54
NC
60or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
61with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
62Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 63section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0e9517a9 64@end copying
252b5132
RH
65@iftex
66@finalout
67@setchapternewpage odd
71ba23f6 68@settitle The GNU linker
252b5132 69@titlepage
71ba23f6 70@title The GNU linker
252b5132 71@sp 1
e49e529d
JM
72@subtitle @code{ld}
73@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
74@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
75@end ifset
252b5132
RH
76@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
77@author Steve Chamberlain
78@author Ian Lance Taylor
252b5132
RH
79@page
80
81@tex
82{\parskip=0pt
704c465c
NC
83\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
84\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
71ba23f6 85\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
252b5132
RH
86\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
87}
88\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
89@end tex
90
91@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
0285c67d 92@c man begin COPYRIGHT
56dd11f0 93Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2013 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 94
0285c67d 95Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 96under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
0285c67d
NC
97or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
98with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
99Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 100section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0285c67d 101@c man end
252b5132 102
252b5132
RH
103@end titlepage
104@end iftex
4ecceb71 105@contents
252b5132
RH
106@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
107
84ec0e6d 108@ifnottex
252b5132 109@node Top
71ba23f6 110@top LD
e49e529d
JM
111This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
112@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
113@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
114@end ifset
115version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 116
cf055d54 117This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
793c5807
NC
118Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
119in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
cf055d54 120
252b5132
RH
121@menu
122* Overview:: Overview
123* Invocation:: Invocation
124* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
125@ifset GENERIC
126* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
127@end ifset
128@ifclear GENERIC
129@ifset H8300
130* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
131@end ifset
c2dcd04e
NC
132@ifset Renesas
133* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
252b5132
RH
134@end ifset
135@ifset I960
136* i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
137@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
138@ifset ARM
139* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
140@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
141@ifset M68HC11
142* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
143@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
144@ifset HPPA
145* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
146@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
147@ifset M68K
148* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
149@end ifset
833794fc
MR
150@ifset MIPS
151* MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
152@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
153@ifset POWERPC
154* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
155@end ifset
156@ifset POWERPC64
157* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
158@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
159@ifset SPU
160* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
161@end ifset
74459f0e
TW
162@ifset TICOFF
163* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
164@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
165@ifset WIN32
166* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
167@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
168@ifset XTENSA
169* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
170@end ifset
252b5132
RH
171@end ifclear
172@ifclear SingleFormat
173* BFD:: BFD
174@end ifclear
175@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
176
177* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
178* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
704c465c 179* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
370b66a1 180* LD Index:: LD Index
252b5132 181@end menu
84ec0e6d 182@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
183
184@node Overview
185@chapter Overview
186
187@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
188@cindex what is this?
0285c67d 189
0879a67a 190@ifset man
0285c67d 191@c man begin SYNOPSIS
ff5dcc92 192ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
0285c67d
NC
193@c man end
194
195@c man begin SEEALSO
196ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
197the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
198@file{ld}.
199@c man end
200@end ifset
201
202@c man begin DESCRIPTION
203
ff5dcc92 204@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
252b5132 205their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
ff5dcc92 206compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
252b5132 207
ff5dcc92 208@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
252b5132
RH
209a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
210to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
211
0285c67d
NC
212@ifset man
213@c For the man only
ece2d90e 214This man page does not describe the command language; see the
71ba23f6
NC
215@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
216language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
0285c67d
NC
217@end ifset
218
252b5132 219@ifclear SingleFormat
ff5dcc92
SC
220This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
221to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
252b5132
RH
222write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
223@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
224available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
225@end ifclear
226
227Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
228linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
229execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
ff5dcc92 230@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
252b5132
RH
231(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
232
0285c67d
NC
233@c man end
234
252b5132
RH
235@node Invocation
236@chapter Invocation
237
0285c67d
NC
238@c man begin DESCRIPTION
239
ff5dcc92 240The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
252b5132
RH
241and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
242you have many choices to control its behavior.
243
0285c67d
NC
244@c man end
245
252b5132
RH
246@ifset UsesEnvVars
247@menu
248* Options:: Command Line Options
249* Environment:: Environment Variables
250@end menu
251
252@node Options
253@section Command Line Options
254@end ifset
255
256@cindex command line
257@cindex options
0285c67d
NC
258
259@c man begin OPTIONS
260
252b5132
RH
261The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
262practice few of them are used in any particular context.
263@cindex standard Unix system
ff5dcc92 264For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
252b5132
RH
265object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
266link a file @code{hello.o}:
267
268@smallexample
269ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
270@end smallexample
271
ff5dcc92 272This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
252b5132
RH
273result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
274the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
275directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
276
ff5dcc92 277Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
511ab9e9
ILT
278point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
279as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
280which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
281files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
282different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
252b5132
RH
283occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
284option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
285noted in the descriptions below.
286
287@cindex object files
511ab9e9
ILT
288Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
289together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
290options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
291an option and its argument.
252b5132
RH
292
293Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
294specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
295and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
296are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
297message @samp{No input files}.
298
36f63dca 299If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
252b5132
RH
300assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
301augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
302linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
303permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
304or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
53d25da6
AM
305@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
306script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
307extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
308to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
309the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
252b5132
RH
310
311For options whose names are a single letter,
312option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
313whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
314option that requires them.
315
316For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
e4897a32 317precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
36f63dca 318@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
e4897a32 319this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
ba1be17e 320only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
e4897a32
NC
321@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
322name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
323output.
324
325Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
326option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
327immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
328@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
329Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
330accepted.
252b5132 331
36f63dca
NC
332Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
333(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
fa19fce0
NC
334prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
335compiler driver) like this:
4e53152f
NC
336
337@smallexample
2509a395 338 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
4e53152f
NC
339@end smallexample
340
341This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
2509a395
SL
342silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
343may also arise when passing options that require values through a
344driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
345a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
346and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
347the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
348
349@smallexample
350 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
351@end smallexample
4e53152f
NC
352
353Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
354linker:
355
ff5dcc92 356@table @gcctabopt
38fc1cb1 357@include at-file.texi
dff70155 358
2509a395
SL
359@kindex -a @var{keyword}
360@item -a @var{keyword}
252b5132
RH
361This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
362argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
363@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
364@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
365to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
366
7ee314fa
AM
367@kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
368@item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
369Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
370@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
371specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
372will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
373finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
9d5777a3 374it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
7ee314fa 375This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
9d5777a3 376interface.
7ee314fa 377
252b5132
RH
378@ifset I960
379@cindex architectures
2509a395
SL
380@kindex -A @var{arch}
381@item -A @var{architecture}
252b5132
RH
382@kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
383@itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
ff5dcc92
SC
384In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
385Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
252b5132
RH
386@var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
387the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
ff5dcc92 388archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
252b5132
RH
389family}, for details.
390
ff5dcc92 391Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
252b5132
RH
392other architecture families.
393@end ifset
394
395@ifclear SingleFormat
396@cindex binary input format
397@kindex -b @var{format}
398@kindex --format=@var{format}
399@cindex input format
400@cindex input format
401@item -b @var{input-format}
402@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
403@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
404file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 405@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
ff5dcc92 406that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
252b5132 407configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
ff5dcc92 408to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
252b5132
RH
409default input format the most usual format on each machine.
410@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
411supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
412formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
413@xref{BFD}.
414
415You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
416binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
417linking object files of different formats), by including
418@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
a1ab1d2a 419particular format.
252b5132
RH
420
421The default format is taken from the environment variable
422@code{GNUTARGET}.
423@ifset UsesEnvVars
424@xref{Environment}.
425@end ifset
426You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
0285c67d
NC
427@code{TARGET};
428@ifclear man
429see @ref{Format Commands}.
430@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
431@end ifclear
432
433@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
434@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
435@cindex compatibility, MRI
436@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
437@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
ff5dcc92 438For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
252b5132 439files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
0285c67d
NC
440@ifclear man
441@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
442@end ifclear
443@ifset man
444the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
445@end ifset
446Introduce MRI script files with
252b5132 447the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
ff5dcc92
SC
448scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
449If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
252b5132
RH
450specified by any @samp{-L} options.
451
452@cindex common allocation
453@kindex -d
454@kindex -dc
455@kindex -dp
a1ab1d2a 456@item -d
252b5132
RH
457@itemx -dc
458@itemx -dp
459These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
460compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
461even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
462script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
463@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
464
7ee314fa
AM
465@kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
466@kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
467@item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
468@itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
469Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
470@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
471specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
472will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
473option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
9d5777a3 474The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
7ee314fa 475
252b5132
RH
476@cindex entry point, from command line
477@kindex -e @var{entry}
478@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
a1ab1d2a 479@item -e @var{entry}
252b5132
RH
480@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
481Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
482program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
483named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
484and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
485base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
486@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
487and other ways of specifying the entry point.
488
b58f81ae
DJ
489@kindex --exclude-libs
490@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
491Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
e1c37eb5 492exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
b58f81ae
DJ
493@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
494automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
495port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
496explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
497option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
498be treated as hidden.
499
e1c37eb5
DK
500@kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
501@item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
502Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
503should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
504into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
505may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
506used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
507the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
508match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
509command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
510of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
511regardless of this option.
512
252b5132
RH
513@cindex dynamic symbol table
514@kindex -E
515@kindex --export-dynamic
267e2722 516@kindex --no-export-dynamic
252b5132
RH
517@item -E
518@itemx --export-dynamic
267e2722
CD
519@itemx --no-export-dynamic
520When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
521option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
522all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
523set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
524
525If you do not use either of these options (or use the
526@option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
527dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
528referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
252b5132
RH
529
530If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
531back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
532dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
533linking the program itself.
534
55255dae 535You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
cb840a31 536be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
55255dae 537See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
cb840a31 538
8b747e1a
DK
539Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
540support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
541the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
542
36f63dca 543@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
544@cindex big-endian objects
545@cindex endianness
546@kindex -EB
547@item -EB
548Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
549
550@cindex little-endian objects
551@kindex -EL
552@item -EL
553Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
36f63dca 554@end ifclear
252b5132 555
2509a395
SL
556@kindex -f @var{name}
557@kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
558@item -f @var{name}
559@itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
560When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
561to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
562table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
563symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
564
565If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
566run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
567the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
568first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
569@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
570in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
571Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
572implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
573machine specific performance.
574
575This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
576will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
577
2509a395
SL
578@kindex -F @var{name}
579@kindex --filter=@var{name}
252b5132 580@item -F @var{name}
2509a395 581@itemx --filter=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
582When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
583the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
584of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
585on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
586
587If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
588run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
589dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
590filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
591found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
592used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
593@var{name}.
594
ff5dcc92 595Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
252b5132 596toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
36f63dca
NC
597object files.
598@ifclear SingleFormat
599The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
ece2d90e 600@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
252b5132 601@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
36f63dca
NC
602environment variable.
603@end ifclear
604The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
605creating an ELF shared object.
252b5132 606
3dbf70a2 607@cindex finalization function
2509a395
SL
608@kindex -fini=@var{name}
609@item -fini=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
610When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
611executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
612address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
613the function to call.
614
252b5132
RH
615@kindex -g
616@item -g
617Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
618
2509a395
SL
619@kindex -G @var{value}
620@kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
252b5132 621@cindex object size
2509a395 622@item -G @var{value}
252b5132
RH
623@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
624Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
625@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
e8044f35 626MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
252b5132
RH
627sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
628
629@cindex runtime library name
2509a395 630@kindex -h @var{name}
252b5132 631@kindex -soname=@var{name}
2509a395 632@item -h @var{name}
252b5132
RH
633@itemx -soname=@var{name}
634When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
635the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
636which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
637linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
638field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
639
640@kindex -i
641@cindex incremental link
642@item -i
643Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
644
3dbf70a2 645@cindex initialization function
2509a395
SL
646@kindex -init=@var{name}
647@item -init=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
648When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
649executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
650of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
651function to call.
652
252b5132 653@cindex archive files, from cmd line
2509a395 654@kindex -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf 655@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
2509a395 656@item -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf
RS
657@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
658Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
659list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
660If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
07d8eb55 661will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
bcb674cf 662will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
252b5132 663
ff5dcc92 664On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
bcb674cf
RS
665files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
666and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
667called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
668@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
669indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
670to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
671@var{filename}.
252b5132
RH
672
673The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
674specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
675was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
676command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
677archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
678the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
679
ff5dcc92 680See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
252b5132
RH
681archives multiple times.
682
683You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
684
685@ifset GENERIC
686This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
ff5dcc92 687if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
252b5132
RH
688behaviour of the AIX linker.
689@end ifset
690
691@cindex search directory, from cmd line
2509a395 692@kindex -L @var{dir}
252b5132 693@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
2509a395 694@item -L @var{searchdir}
252b5132 695@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
ff5dcc92
SC
696Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
697for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
252b5132
RH
698option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
699in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
700on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
ff5dcc92 701@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
7d24f02c
KH
702order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
703how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
704option is specified.
252b5132 705
9c8ebd6a
DJ
706If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
707by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, a path specified when the linker is configured.
708
252b5132
RH
709@ifset UsesEnvVars
710The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
ff5dcc92 711@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
252b5132
RH
712some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
713@end ifset
714
715The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
716@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
717at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
718
719@cindex emulation
720@kindex -m @var{emulation}
2509a395 721@item -m @var{emulation}
252b5132
RH
722Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
723emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
724
725If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
726@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
727
728Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
729configured.
730
731@cindex link map
732@kindex -M
733@kindex --print-map
734@item -M
735@itemx --print-map
736Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
737information about the link, including the following:
738
739@itemize @bullet
740@item
3b83e13a 741Where object files are mapped into memory.
252b5132
RH
742@item
743How common symbols are allocated.
744@item
745All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
746which caused the archive member to be brought in.
3b83e13a
NC
747@item
748The values assigned to symbols.
749
750Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
751involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
752have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
753linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
754of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
755the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
756linker script containing:
757
758@smallexample
759 foo = 1
760 foo = foo * 4
761 foo = foo + 8
762@end smallexample
763
764will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
765option is used:
766
767@smallexample
768 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
769 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
770 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
771@end smallexample
772
773See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
774scripts.
252b5132
RH
775@end itemize
776
777@kindex -n
778@cindex read-only text
779@cindex NMAGIC
780@kindex --nmagic
781@item -n
782@itemx --nmagic
90f5d9d9
JZ
783Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
784libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
785mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
252b5132
RH
786
787@kindex -N
788@kindex --omagic
789@cindex read/write from cmd line
790@cindex OMAGIC
a1ab1d2a 791@item -N
252b5132
RH
792@itemx --omagic
793Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
63fd3b82
NC
794not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
795libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
4d8907ac
DS
796mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
797is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
798specification published by Microsoft.
63fd3b82
NC
799
800@kindex --no-omagic
801@cindex OMAGIC
802@item --no-omagic
803This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
804sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
805be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
806shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
252b5132
RH
807
808@kindex -o @var{output}
809@kindex --output=@var{output}
810@cindex naming the output file
811@item -o @var{output}
812@itemx --output=@var{output}
ff5dcc92 813Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
252b5132
RH
814option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
815script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
816
817@kindex -O @var{level}
818@cindex generating optimized output
819@item -O @var{level}
ff5dcc92 820If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
252b5132 821the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
98c503ac
NC
822should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
823option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
824the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
825no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
826of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
252b5132 827
a712da20
NC
828@kindex -q
829@kindex --emit-relocs
830@cindex retain relocations in final executable
831@item -q
832@itemx --emit-relocs
ba1be17e 833Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
a712da20
NC
834Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
835order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
836in larger executables.
837
dbab7a7b
NC
838This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
839
4f471f39
RS
840@kindex --force-dynamic
841@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
842@item --force-dynamic
843Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
844to VxWorks targets.
845
252b5132
RH
846@cindex partial link
847@cindex relocatable output
848@kindex -r
1049f94e 849@kindex --relocatable
252b5132 850@item -r
1049f94e 851@itemx --relocatable
252b5132 852Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 853turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
252b5132
RH
854linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
855magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
856@code{OMAGIC}.
ff5dcc92 857@c ; see @option{-N}.
252b5132
RH
858If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
859linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
860constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
861
62bf86b4
HPN
862When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
863partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
864relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
865example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
866with input files in other formats at all.
867
252b5132
RH
868This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
869
870@kindex -R @var{file}
871@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
872@cindex symbol-only input
873@item -R @var{filename}
874@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
875Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
876relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
877to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
878programs. You may use this option more than once.
879
ff5dcc92 880For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 881followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 882the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
883
884@kindex -s
885@kindex --strip-all
886@cindex strip all symbols
a1ab1d2a 887@item -s
252b5132
RH
888@itemx --strip-all
889Omit all symbol information from the output file.
890
891@kindex -S
892@kindex --strip-debug
893@cindex strip debugger symbols
a1ab1d2a 894@item -S
252b5132
RH
895@itemx --strip-debug
896Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
897
898@kindex -t
899@kindex --trace
900@cindex input files, displaying
a1ab1d2a 901@item -t
252b5132 902@itemx --trace
ff5dcc92 903Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
252b5132
RH
904
905@kindex -T @var{script}
906@kindex --script=@var{script}
907@cindex script files
908@item -T @var{scriptfile}
909@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
910Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
ff5dcc92 911@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
252b5132 912@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
114283d8
NC
913output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
914the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
915specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
916options accumulate.
252b5132 917
14be8564
L
918@kindex -dT @var{script}
919@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
920@cindex script files
921@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
922@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
923Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
924
925This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
926processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
927command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
928@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
929behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
930command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
931the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
932@samp{gcc}).
933
252b5132
RH
934@kindex -u @var{symbol}
935@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
936@cindex undefined symbol
937@item -u @var{symbol}
938@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
939Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
940symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
941modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
942different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
943option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
944
945@kindex -Ur
946@cindex constructors
a1ab1d2a 947@item -Ur
252b5132
RH
948For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
949@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 950turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
252b5132
RH
951@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
952It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
953with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
954be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
955@samp{-r} for the others.
956
577a0623
AM
957@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
958@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
959Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
960@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
961missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
962specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
963multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
964input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
965in a linker script.
a854a4a7 966
252b5132
RH
967@kindex -v
968@kindex -V
969@kindex --version
970@cindex version
971@item -v
972@itemx --version
973@itemx -V
ff5dcc92 974Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
252b5132
RH
975lists the supported emulations.
976
977@kindex -x
978@kindex --discard-all
979@cindex deleting local symbols
980@item -x
981@itemx --discard-all
982Delete all local symbols.
983
984@kindex -X
985@kindex --discard-locals
986@cindex local symbols, deleting
a1ab1d2a 987@item -X
252b5132 988@itemx --discard-locals
3c68c38f
BW
989Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
990system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
991or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
252b5132
RH
992
993@kindex -y @var{symbol}
994@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
995@cindex symbol tracing
996@item -y @var{symbol}
997@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
998Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
999option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1000to prepend an underscore.
1001
1002This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1003don't know where the reference is coming from.
1004
1005@kindex -Y @var{path}
1006@item -Y @var{path}
1007Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1008for Solaris compatibility.
1009
1010@kindex -z @var{keyword}
1011@item -z @var{keyword}
cd6d6c15
NC
1012The recognized keywords are:
1013@table @samp
1014
1015@item combreloc
1016Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
1017lookup caching possible.
1018
1019@item defs
560e09e9 1020Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
07f3b6ad 1021shared libraries are still allowed.
cd6d6c15 1022
6aa29e7b
JJ
1023@item execstack
1024Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1025
b039ef04
L
1026@item global
1027This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1028the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1029of subsequently loaded libraries.
1030
cd6d6c15
NC
1031@item initfirst
1032This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1033It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1034before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1035the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1036the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1037objects.
1038
1039@item interpose
1040Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1041but the primary executable.
1042
5fa222e4
AM
1043@item lazy
1044When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1045dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1046the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1047Lazy binding is the default.
1048
cd6d6c15
NC
1049@item loadfltr
1050Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1051runtime.
1052
1053@item muldefs
1054Allows multiple definitions.
1055
1056@item nocombreloc
1057Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1058
1059@item nocopyreloc
1060Disables production of copy relocs.
1061
1062@item nodefaultlib
1063Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1064ignore any default library search paths.
1065
1066@item nodelete
1067Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1068
1069@item nodlopen
1070Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1071
1072@item nodump
1073Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1074
6aa29e7b
JJ
1075@item noexecstack
1076Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1077
1078@item norelro
1079Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1080
cd6d6c15
NC
1081@item now
1082When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1083dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1084when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1085deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1086first called.
1087
1088@item origin
1089Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1090
6aa29e7b
JJ
1091@item relro
1092Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1093
24718e3b
L
1094@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1095Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1096
1097@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1098Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1099
04c3a755
NS
1100@item stack-size=@var{value}
1101Specify a stack size for in an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
1102Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1103@code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1104
cd6d6c15
NC
1105@end table
1106
ece2d90e 1107Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
252b5132
RH
1108
1109@kindex -(
1110@cindex groups of archives
1111@item -( @var{archives} -)
1112@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1113The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1114either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1115
1116The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1117references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1118the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1119archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1120object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1121would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1122they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1123resolved.
1124
1125Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1126it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1127more archives.
1128
69da35b5
NC
1129@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1130@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1131@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1132@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1133Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
2ca22b03 1134recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
69da35b5
NC
1135and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1136the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1137behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1138so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1139restore the old behaviour.
2ca22b03 1140
4a43e768
AM
1141@kindex --as-needed
1142@kindex --no-as-needed
1143@item --as-needed
1144@itemx --no-as-needed
1145This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
ddbb8a31 1146on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
4a43e768
AM
1147the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1148on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
ddbb8a31 1149needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
ffa9430d
AM
1150emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1151non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1152the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other libraries, a
1153non-weak undefined symbol reference from another dynamic library.
1154Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1155the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1156needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1157from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
4a43e768 1158
e56f61be
L
1159@kindex --add-needed
1160@kindex --no-add-needed
1161@item --add-needed
1162@itemx --no-add-needed
ddbb8a31
NC
1163These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1164their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1165options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1166and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
e56f61be 1167
252b5132
RH
1168@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1169@item -assert @var{keyword}
1170This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1171
1172@kindex -Bdynamic
1173@kindex -dy
1174@kindex -call_shared
1175@item -Bdynamic
1176@itemx -dy
1177@itemx -call_shared
1178Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1179for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1180default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1181for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1182multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
da8bce14 1183@option{-l} options which follow it.
252b5132 1184
a1ab1d2a
UD
1185@kindex -Bgroup
1186@item -Bgroup
1187Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1188section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1189object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
560e09e9
NC
1190@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1191only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
a1ab1d2a 1192
252b5132
RH
1193@kindex -Bstatic
1194@kindex -dn
1195@kindex -non_shared
1196@kindex -static
a1ab1d2a 1197@item -Bstatic
252b5132
RH
1198@itemx -dn
1199@itemx -non_shared
1200@itemx -static
1201Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1202platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1203variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1204may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
560e09e9 1205library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
e9156f74
NC
1206option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1207option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1208shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1209references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
ece2d90e 1210libraries.
252b5132
RH
1211
1212@kindex -Bsymbolic
1213@item -Bsymbolic
1214When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1215definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1216for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1217within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on ELF
1218platforms which support shared libraries.
1219
40b36307
L
1220@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1221@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1222When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
c0065db7 1223symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
40b36307
L
1224This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1225libraries.
1226
55255dae
L
1227@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1228@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1229Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1230typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1231global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1232within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1233to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1234in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1235which support shared libraries.
1236
1237The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1238scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1239
40b36307
L
1240@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1241@item --dynamic-list-data
1242Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1243
1244@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1245@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1246Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1247is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1248
0b8a70d9
L
1249@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1250@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1251Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1252
252b5132
RH
1253@kindex --check-sections
1254@kindex --no-check-sections
1255@item --check-sections
308b1ffd 1256@itemx --no-check-sections
252b5132 1257Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
7d816a17 1258been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
252b5132
RH
1259perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1260suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1261allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
560e09e9 1262restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
02b0b1aa
NS
1263Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1264force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1265option.
252b5132 1266
ddbb8a31
NC
1267@kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1268@kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1269@item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1270@itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
9d5777a3 1271This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
ddbb8a31 1272by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
08efffb8 1273command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
ddbb8a31 1274output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
08efffb8 1275input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
ddbb8a31 1276specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
08efffb8
MM
1277follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1278behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
ddbb8a31
NC
1279
1280This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
08efffb8
MM
1281libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1282mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1283their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1284required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1285the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1286dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
ddbb8a31
NC
1287symbols.
1288
252b5132
RH
1289@cindex cross reference table
1290@kindex --cref
1291@item --cref
1292Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1293generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1294Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1295
1296The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1297easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1298sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1299symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
049c1c8e
NC
1300definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1301where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1302symbol are listed.
252b5132 1303
4818e05f
AM
1304@cindex common allocation
1305@kindex --no-define-common
1306@item --no-define-common
1307This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1308The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1309@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1310
1311The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1312the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1313of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1314forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1315Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1316from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1317This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1318and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1319duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1320paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1321
252b5132 1322@cindex symbols, from command line
2509a395
SL
1323@kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1324@item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
252b5132
RH
1325Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1326address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1327times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1328limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1329context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1330symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1331constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1332using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments,,
1333Assignment: Symbol Definitions}). @emph{Note:} there should be no white
1334space between @var{symbol}, the equals sign (``@key{=}''), and
1335@var{expression}.
1336
1337@cindex demangling, from command line
28c309a2 1338@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132 1339@kindex --no-demangle
28c309a2 1340@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132
RH
1341@itemx --no-demangle
1342These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1343and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1344present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1345underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
a1ab1d2a
UD
1346mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1347different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1348to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
28c309a2
NC
1349demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1350is set. These options may be used to override the default.
252b5132
RH
1351
1352@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
506eee22 1353@kindex -I@var{file}
2509a395
SL
1354@kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1355@item -I@var{file}
1356@itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
252b5132
RH
1357Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1358generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1359linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1360doing.
1361
7ce691ae 1362@kindex --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd 1363@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
7ce691ae 1364@item --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd
NC
1365@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1366Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1367with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
7ce691ae 1368
252b5132
RH
1369@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1370@item --force-exe-suffix
1371Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1372
1373If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1374@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1375the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1376option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1377Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1378it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1379
1380@kindex --gc-sections
1381@kindex --no-gc-sections
1382@cindex garbage collection
c17d87de
NC
1383@item --gc-sections
1384@itemx --no-gc-sections
252b5132 1385Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
ac69cbc6 1386targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
b3549761
NC
1387performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1388@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line.
252b5132 1389
d5465ba2
AM
1390@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1391examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1392symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1393command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1394referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1395libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1396referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1397the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1398relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1399
ac69cbc6 1400This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
9d5777a3 1401@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
ac69cbc6
TG
1402specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1403a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1404
c17d87de
NC
1405@kindex --print-gc-sections
1406@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1407@cindex garbage collection
1408@item --print-gc-sections
1409@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1410List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1411printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1412collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1413default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1414be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1415line.
1416
30824704
RM
1417@kindex --print-output-format
1418@cindex output format
1419@item --print-output-format
1420Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1421other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1422in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1423
252b5132
RH
1424@cindex help
1425@cindex usage
1426@kindex --help
1427@item --help
1428Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1429
ea20a7da
CC
1430@kindex --target-help
1431@item --target-help
1432Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1433
2509a395
SL
1434@kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1435@item -Map=@var{mapfile}
252b5132 1436Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
560e09e9 1437@option{-M} option, above.
252b5132
RH
1438
1439@cindex memory usage
1440@kindex --no-keep-memory
1441@item --no-keep-memory
ff5dcc92
SC
1442@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1443symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
252b5132 1444instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
ff5dcc92 1445necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
252b5132
RH
1446while linking a large executable.
1447
1448@kindex --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1449@kindex -z defs
252b5132 1450@item --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1451@itemx -z defs
560e09e9
NC
1452Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1453is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1454The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1455behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
ece2d90e 1456libraries being linked in.
252b5132 1457
aa713662
L
1458@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1459@kindex -z muldefs
1460@item --allow-multiple-definition
1461@itemx -z muldefs
1462Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1463report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1464first definition will be used.
1465
b79e8c78 1466@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1467@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
b79e8c78 1468@item --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1469@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
903249d7 1470Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
560e09e9
NC
1471This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1472determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1473shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1474how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1475
903249d7
NC
1476The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1477referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1478an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1479a shared library.
1480
1481The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1482libraries specified at link time are that:
1483
1484@itemize @bullet
1485@item
1486A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1487that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1488resolvable at load time.
1489@item
1490There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1491symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1492
1493The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1494select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1495architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1496appropriate memset function.
1497@end itemize
b79e8c78 1498
31941635
L
1499@kindex --no-undefined-version
1500@item --no-undefined-version
1501Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1502it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1503will be issued instead.
1504
3e3b46e5
PB
1505@kindex --default-symver
1506@item --default-symver
1507Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
fc0e6df6
PB
1508exported symbols.
1509
1510@kindex --default-imported-symver
1511@item --default-imported-symver
1512Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1513imported symbols.
3e3b46e5 1514
252b5132
RH
1515@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1516@item --no-warn-mismatch
ff5dcc92 1517Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
252b5132
RH
1518files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1519been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
ff5dcc92 1520This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
252b5132
RH
1521errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1522have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1523inappropriate.
1524
fe7929ce
AM
1525@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1526@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1527Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1528library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1529
252b5132
RH
1530@kindex --no-whole-archive
1531@item --no-whole-archive
ff5dcc92 1532Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
252b5132
RH
1533archive files.
1534
1535@cindex output file after errors
1536@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1537@item --noinhibit-exec
1538Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1539Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1540errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1541when it issues any error whatsoever.
1542
0a9c1c8e
CD
1543@kindex -nostdlib
1544@item -nostdlib
1545Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1546command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1547(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1548
252b5132 1549@ifclear SingleFormat
2509a395
SL
1550@kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1551@item --oformat=@var{output-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
1552@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1553file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 1554@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
ff5dcc92
SC
1555object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1556object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
1557should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1558usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1559name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1560list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1561command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1562this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1563@end ifclear
1564
36af4a4e
JJ
1565@kindex -pie
1566@kindex --pic-executable
1567@item -pie
1568@itemx --pic-executable
1569@cindex position independent executables
1570Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1571ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1572libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
7e7d5768 1573address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
36af4a4e
JJ
1574normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1575defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1576
252b5132
RH
1577@kindex -qmagic
1578@item -qmagic
1579This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1580
1581@kindex -Qy
1582@item -Qy
1583This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1584
1585@kindex --relax
1586@cindex synthesizing linker
1587@cindex relaxing addressing modes
28d5f677 1588@cindex --no-relax
252b5132 1589@item --relax
28d5f677 1590@itemx --no-relax
a1ab1d2a 1591An option with machine dependent effects.
252b5132
RH
1592@ifset GENERIC
1593This option is only supported on a few targets.
1594@end ifset
1595@ifset H8300
ff5dcc92 1596@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
252b5132
RH
1597@end ifset
1598@ifset I960
ff5dcc92 1599@xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
252b5132 1600@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
1601@ifset XTENSA
1602@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1603@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
1604@ifset M68HC11
1605@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1606@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
1607@ifset POWERPC
1608@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1609@end ifset
252b5132 1610
28d5f677
NC
1611On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1612global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1613addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1614synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
11e7fd74 1615instructions, and combining constant values.
252b5132
RH
1616
1617On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1618debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1619@ifset GENERIC
28d5f677
NC
1620This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1621family of processors.
252b5132
RH
1622@end ifset
1623
1624@ifset GENERIC
1625On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1626but ignored.
1627@end ifset
1628
28d5f677
NC
1629On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1630@samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1631
252b5132
RH
1632@cindex retaining specified symbols
1633@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1634@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
2509a395
SL
1635@kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1636@item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
252b5132
RH
1637Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1638discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1639symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1640@ifset GENERIC
1641(such as VxWorks)
1642@end ifset
1643where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1644run-time memory.
1645
1646@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1647or symbols needed for relocations.
1648
1649You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1650line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1651
1652@ifset GENERIC
2509a395 1653@item -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1654@cindex runtime library search path
2509a395 1655@kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1656Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
ff5dcc92 1657linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
252b5132 1658arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
ff5dcc92 1659them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
252b5132
RH
1660also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1661objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
ff5dcc92 1662@option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
252b5132
RH
1663ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1664@code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1665
ff5dcc92 1666The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
252b5132 1667SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search patch out of all the
ff5dcc92
SC
1668@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1669runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1670options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1671gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
b45619c0 1672file systems.
252b5132 1673
ff5dcc92 1674For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 1675followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 1676the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
1677@end ifset
1678
1679@ifset GENERIC
1680@cindex link-time runtime library search path
2509a395
SL
1681@kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1682@item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
252b5132
RH
1683When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1684happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1685of the input files.
1686
1687When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1688non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1689shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
ff5dcc92 1690explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
252b5132 1691specifies the first set of directories to search. The
ff5dcc92 1692@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
252b5132
RH
1693either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1694appearing multiple times.
1695
28c309a2
NC
1696This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1697that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1698is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1699runtime linker would do.
1700
252b5132 1701The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
ece2d90e 1702libraries:
252b5132
RH
1703@enumerate
1704@item
ff5dcc92 1705Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
252b5132 1706@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1707Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1708between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1709specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1710used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
ece2d90e
NC
1711at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1712by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1713the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
252b5132 1714@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1715On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1716@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1717environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
252b5132 1718@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1719On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1720directories specified using @option{-L} options.
252b5132 1721@item
a1b8d843 1722For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
e2a83dd0 1723variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
252b5132 1724@item
ec4eb78a
L
1725For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1726@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1727libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1728@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1729@item
252b5132
RH
1730The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1731@item
1732For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1733exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1734@end enumerate
1735
1736If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1737warning and continue with the link.
1738@end ifset
1739
1740@kindex -shared
1741@kindex -Bshareable
1742@item -shared
1743@itemx -Bshareable
1744@cindex shared libraries
1745Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1746and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
ff5dcc92 1747shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
252b5132
RH
1748undefined symbols in the link.
1749
252b5132 1750@kindex --sort-common
2509a395
SL
1751@item --sort-common
1752@itemx --sort-common=ascending
1753@itemx --sort-common=descending
de7dd2bd
NC
1754This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1755ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1756sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1757eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1758between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
1759specified, then descending order is assumed.
252b5132 1760
2509a395
SL
1761@kindex --sort-section=name
1762@item --sort-section=name
bcaa7b3e
L
1763This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1764patterns in the linker script.
1765
2509a395
SL
1766@kindex --sort-section=alignment
1767@item --sort-section=alignment
bcaa7b3e
L
1768This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
1769patterns in the linker script.
1770
252b5132 1771@kindex --split-by-file
2509a395 1772@item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
ff5dcc92 1773Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
a854a4a7
AM
1774each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
1775size of 1 if not given.
252b5132
RH
1776
1777@kindex --split-by-reloc
2509a395 1778@item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
a854a4a7 1779Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
252b5132 1780output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
a854a4a7 1781This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
252b5132
RH
1782certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
1783cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
1784that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
1785support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
1786input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
1787more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
a854a4a7 1788many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
252b5132
RH
1789
1790@kindex --stats
1791@item --stats
1792Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
1793as execution time and memory usage.
1794
2509a395 1795@kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
e2243057
RS
1796@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
1797Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
1798configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
1799that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
1800
252b5132
RH
1801@kindex --traditional-format
1802@cindex traditional format
1803@item --traditional-format
ff5dcc92
SC
1804For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
1805the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
252b5132
RH
1806use the traditional format instead.
1807
1808@cindex dbx
ff5dcc92 1809For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
252b5132
RH
1810symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
1811full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
1812@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
ff5dcc92 1813trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
252b5132
RH
1814combine duplicate entries.
1815
2509a395
SL
1816@kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1817@item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
176355da
NC
1818Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
1819address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
1820times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
1821line.
1822@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
1823for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
1824@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
1825should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
1826sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
1827
2509a395
SL
1828@kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
1829@kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
1830@kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
252b5132 1831@cindex segment origins, cmd line
2509a395
SL
1832@item -Tbss=@var{org}
1833@itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
1834@itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
1835Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
a6e02871 1836@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
252b5132 1837
2509a395
SL
1838@kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1839@item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
258795f5
L
1840@cindex text segment origin, cmd line
1841When creating an ELF executable or shared object, it will set the address
1842of the first byte of the text segment.
1843
9d5777a3
RM
1844@kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
1845@item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
1846@cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
1847When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
1848the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
1849text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
1850
0d705e9f
AM
1851@kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
1852@item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
1853@cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
1854When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
1855model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
1856
560e09e9
NC
1857@kindex --unresolved-symbols
1858@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
1859Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
1860values for @samp{method}:
1861
1862@table @samp
1863@item ignore-all
da8bce14 1864Do not report any unresolved symbols.
560e09e9
NC
1865
1866@item report-all
da8bce14 1867Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
560e09e9
NC
1868
1869@item ignore-in-object-files
1870Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
1871ignore them if they come from regular object files.
1872
1873@item ignore-in-shared-libs
1874Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
1875ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
1876when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
1877libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
1878command line.
1879@end table
1880
1881The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
1882by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
1883
1884Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
1885unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
1886can change this to a warning.
1887
1715a13c
L
1888@kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
1889@cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
252b5132 1890@item --dll-verbose
1715a13c 1891@itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
ff5dcc92 1892Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
252b5132 1893supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
1715a13c
L
1894the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
1895argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
252b5132
RH
1896
1897@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1898@cindex version script, symbol versions
2509a395 1899@item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
252b5132
RH
1900Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
1901used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
36f63dca 1902about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
09e2aba4
DK
1903is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
1904see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
1905use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
1906symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
1907@xref{WIN32}.
252b5132 1908
7ce691ae 1909@kindex --warn-common
252b5132
RH
1910@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
1911@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
1912@item --warn-common
1913Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
11e7fd74 1914a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
252b5132
RH
1915but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
1916you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
11e7fd74 1917Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
252b5132
RH
1918warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
1919
1920There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
1921
1922@table @samp
1923@item int i = 1;
1924A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
1925file.
1926
1927@item extern int i;
1928An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
1929There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
1930variable somewhere.
1931
1932@item int i;
1933A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
1934variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
1935The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
1936single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
1937size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
1938a definition of the same variable.
1939@end table
1940
1941The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
1942Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
1943just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
1944encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
1945a common symbol.
1946
1947@enumerate
1948@item
1949Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
1950definition for the symbol.
1951@smallexample
1952@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1953 overridden by definition
1954@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
1955@end smallexample
1956
1957@item
1958Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
1959the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
1960except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
1961@smallexample
1962@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
1963 overriding common
1964@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
1965@end smallexample
1966
1967@item
1968Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
1969@smallexample
1970@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
1971 of `@var{symbol}'
1972@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
1973@end smallexample
1974
1975@item
1976Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
1977@smallexample
1978@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1979 overridden by larger common
1980@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
1981@end smallexample
1982
1983@item
1984Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
1985the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
1986encountered in a different order.
1987@smallexample
1988@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1989 overriding smaller common
1990@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
1991@end smallexample
1992@end enumerate
1993
1994@kindex --warn-constructors
1995@item --warn-constructors
1996Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
1997object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
1998detect the use of global constructors.
1999
2000@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2001@item --warn-multiple-gp
2002Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2003This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2004Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2005section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2006of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2007base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2008base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2009bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2010large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2011values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2012option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2013
2014@kindex --warn-once
2015@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2016@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2017@item --warn-once
2018Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2019which refers to it.
2020
2021@kindex --warn-section-align
2022@cindex warnings, on section alignment
2023@cindex section alignment, warnings on
2024@item --warn-section-align
2025Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2026alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2027The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2028is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2029the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2030
8fdd7217
NC
2031@kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2032@item --warn-shared-textrel
ece2d90e 2033Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
8fdd7217 2034
a0c402a5
L
2035@kindex --warn-alternate-em
2036@item --warn-alternate-em
2037Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2038
560e09e9
NC
2039@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2040@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2041If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2042@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2043This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2044
2045@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2046@item --error-unresolved-symbols
2047This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2048it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2049
252b5132
RH
2050@kindex --whole-archive
2051@cindex including an entire archive
2052@item --whole-archive
2053For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
ff5dcc92 2054@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
252b5132
RH
2055in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2056files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2057library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2058library. This option may be used more than once.
2059
7ec229ce 2060Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
ff5dcc92
SC
2061about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2062Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
7ec229ce
DD
2063list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2064your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2065
2509a395
SL
2066@kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2067@item --wrap=@var{symbol}
252b5132
RH
2068Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2069@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2070undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2071@var{symbol}.
2072
2073This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2074wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2075wishes to call the system function, it should call
2076@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2077
2078Here is a trivial example:
2079
2080@smallexample
2081void *
cc2f008e 2082__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
252b5132 2083@{
cc2f008e 2084 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
252b5132
RH
2085 return __real_malloc (c);
2086@}
2087@end smallexample
2088
ff5dcc92 2089If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
252b5132
RH
2090all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2091instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2092call the real @code{malloc} function.
2093
2094You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
ff5dcc92 2095links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
252b5132
RH
2096you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2097file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2098call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2099
6aa29e7b
JJ
2100@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2101@item --eh-frame-hdr
2102Request creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr} section and ELF
2103@code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2104
e41b3a13
JJ
2105@kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2106@item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2107Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2108generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2109if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2110
6c1439be
L
2111@kindex --enable-new-dtags
2112@kindex --disable-new-dtags
2113@item --enable-new-dtags
2114@itemx --disable-new-dtags
2115This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2116systems may not understand them. If you specify
b1b00fcc
MF
2117@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2118and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
ff5dcc92 2119If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
6c1439be
L
2120created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2121those options are only available for ELF systems.
2122
2d643429 2123@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
e185dd51 2124@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2d643429
NC
2125Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2126close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2127time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2128increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2129value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2130
fdc90cb4
JJ
2131@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2132@item --hash-style=@var{style}
2133Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2134@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2135new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2136the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2137hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2138
35835446
JR
2139@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2140@item --reduce-memory-overheads
2141This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
f2a8f148 2142linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
35835446 2143for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2d643429
NC
2144about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2145
4f9c04f7 2146Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2d643429 21471021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
a85785bc 2148run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2d643429
NC
2149has been used.
2150
2151The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2152enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
35835446 2153
c0065db7
RM
2154@kindex --build-id
2155@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2156@item --build-id
2157@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
2158Request creation of @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section.
2159The contents of the note are unique bits identifying this linked
2160file. @var{style} can be @code{uuid} to use 128 random bits,
24382dca
RM
2161@code{sha1} to use a 160-bit @sc{SHA1} hash on the normative
2162parts of the output contents, @code{md5} to use a 128-bit
2163@sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of the output contents, or
2164@code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit string specified as
2165an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and @code{:}
2166characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style} is
2167omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
2168
2169The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2170that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2171unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2172to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2173file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2174string identifying the original linked file does not change.
c0065db7
RM
2175
2176Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2177@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
252b5132
RH
2178@end table
2179
0285c67d
NC
2180@c man end
2181
36f63dca 2182@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
252b5132 2183
0285c67d
NC
2184@c man begin OPTIONS
2185
ff5dcc92 2186The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
252b5132
RH
2187the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2188normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2189use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2190@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2191like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2192symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2193object file).
2194
2195In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2196support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2197PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2198values by either a space or an equals sign.
2199
ff5dcc92 2200@table @gcctabopt
252b5132
RH
2201
2202@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2203@item --add-stdcall-alias
2204If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2205as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
bb10df36 2206[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2207
2208@kindex --base-file
2209@item --base-file @var{file}
2210Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2211addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2212@file{dlltool}.
bb10df36 2213[This is an i386 PE specific option]
252b5132
RH
2214
2215@kindex --dll
2216@item --dll
2217Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
ff5dcc92 2218@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
252b5132 2219file.
bb10df36 2220[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2221
88183869
DK
2222@kindex --enable-long-section-names
2223@kindex --disable-long-section-names
2224@item --enable-long-section-names
2225@itemx --disable-long-section-names
2226The PE variants of the Coff object format add an extension that permits
2227the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2228for Coff. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2229fully-linked executable images do not carry the Coff string table required
2230to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2231allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2232disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2233generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2234as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
9d5777a3
RM
2235with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2236GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
3efd345c
DK
2237information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2238option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2239section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2240when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2241image and not stripping symbols.
88183869
DK
2242[This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2243
252b5132
RH
2244@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2245@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2246@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2247@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2248If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
36f63dca 2249do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
252b5132
RH
2250only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2251resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2252undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2253@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2254to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2255warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2256import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
ff5dcc92 2257to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
252b5132 2258feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
ff5dcc92 2259@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
252b5132 2260mismatches are considered to be errors.
bb10df36 2261[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2262
522f09cd
KT
2263@kindex --leading-underscore
2264@kindex --no-leading-underscore
2265@item --leading-underscore
2266@itemx --no-leading-underscore
2267For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2268in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2269disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2270
252b5132
RH
2271@cindex DLLs, creating
2272@kindex --export-all-symbols
2273@item --export-all-symbols
2274If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2275be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2276otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2277explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2278attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2279option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
ece2d90e 2280@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
b044cda1 2281@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
ece2d90e
NC
2282exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2283re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2284such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2285@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
b044cda1
CW
2286@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2287Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2288not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
ece2d90e 2289extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
b044cda1 2290(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
ece2d90e 2291These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
b044cda1 2292@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
ece2d90e 2293@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
b044cda1 2294@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
ece2d90e 2295@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
bb10df36 2296[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2297
2298@kindex --exclude-symbols
1d0a3c9c 2299@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
252b5132
RH
2300Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2301exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
bb10df36 2302[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2303
2927aaca
NC
2304@kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2305@item --exclude-all-symbols
2306Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2307[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2308
252b5132
RH
2309@kindex --file-alignment
2310@item --file-alignment
2311Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2312file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2313512.
bb10df36 2314[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2315
2316@cindex heap size
2317@kindex --heap
2318@item --heap @var{reserve}
2319@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2320Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2321to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2322committed.
bb10df36 2323[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2324
2325@cindex image base
2326@kindex --image-base
2327@item --image-base @var{value}
2328Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2329the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2330is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2331your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2332other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2333for dlls.
bb10df36 2334[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2335
2336@kindex --kill-at
2337@item --kill-at
2338If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2339symbols before they are exported.
bb10df36 2340[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2341
26d2d8a2
BF
2342@kindex --large-address-aware
2343@item --large-address-aware
b45619c0 2344If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
26d2d8a2 2345header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
b45619c0 2346greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
26d2d8a2
BF
2347or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2348section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2349[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2350
f69a2f97
NC
2351@kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2352@item --disable-large-address-aware
2353Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2354This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2355driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2356addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2357[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2358
252b5132
RH
2359@kindex --major-image-version
2360@item --major-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2361Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
bb10df36 2362[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2363
2364@kindex --major-os-version
2365@item --major-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2366Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2367[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2368
2369@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2370@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2371Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2372[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2373
2374@kindex --minor-image-version
2375@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2376Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2377[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2378
2379@kindex --minor-os-version
2380@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2381Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2382[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2383
2384@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2385@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2386Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2387[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2388
2389@cindex DEF files, creating
2390@cindex DLLs, creating
2391@kindex --output-def
2392@item --output-def @var{file}
2393The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2394file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2395(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2396library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2397automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
bb10df36 2398[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2399
b044cda1
CW
2400@cindex DLLs, creating
2401@kindex --out-implib
2402@item --out-implib @var{file}
2403The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain an
2404import lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This
2405import lib (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a}
560e09e9 2406may be used to link clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour
b044cda1
CW
2407makes it possible to skip a separate @code{dlltool} import library
2408creation step.
bb10df36 2409[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2410
2411@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2412@item --enable-auto-image-base
2413Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, unless one is specified
2414using the @code{--image-base} argument. By using a hash generated
2415from the dllname to create unique image bases for each DLL, in-memory
2416collisions and relocations which can delay program execution are
2417avoided.
bb10df36 2418[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2419
2420@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2421@item --disable-auto-image-base
2422Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2423user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2424default.
bb10df36 2425[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2426
2427@cindex DLLs, linking to
2428@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2429@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
489d0400 2430When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
ece2d90e 2431search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
560e09e9 2432@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
b044cda1
CW
2433between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2434uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
ece2d90e 2435@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
bb10df36 2436[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2437
2438@kindex --enable-auto-import
2439@item --enable-auto-import
ece2d90e
NC
2440Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2441DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
4d8907ac
DS
2442building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2443'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2444to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2445specification published by Microsoft.
2446
e2a83dd0
NC
2447Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2448data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2449placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2450around a problem with consts that is described here:
2451http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2452
4d8907ac
DS
2453Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2454see this message:
0d888aac 2455
ece2d90e 2456"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
0d888aac
CW
2457documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2458
ece2d90e
NC
2459This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2460ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
c0065db7
RM
2461allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2462fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2463constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2f8d8971
NC
2464multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2465this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2466of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2467the warning, and exit.
2468
2469There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2470data type of the exported variable:
0d888aac 2471
2fa9fc65
NC
2472One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2473of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
560e09e9 2474this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2fa9fc65 2475
c0065db7
RM
2476A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2477that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2478there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
0d888aac
CW
2479a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2480
2481@example
2482extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2483extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2484 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2485@end example
2486
2487or
2488
2489@example
2490extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2491extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2492 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2493@end example
2494
c0065db7 2495For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2f8d8971 2496is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
0d888aac
CW
2497
2498@example
2499extern struct s extern_struct;
c0065db7 2500extern_struct.field -->
0d888aac
CW
2501 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2502@end example
2503
c406afaf
NC
2504or
2505
2506@example
2507extern long long extern_ll;
2508extern_ll -->
2509 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2510@end example
2511
2fa9fc65 2512A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
c0065db7 2513'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
11e7fd74 2514@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
0d888aac 2515requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
c0065db7
RM
2516building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2517merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2518between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
0d888aac
CW
2519constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2520
2521Original:
2522@example
2523--foo.h
2524extern int arr[];
2525--foo.c
2526#include "foo.h"
2527void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2528 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2529@}
2530@end example
2531
2532Solution 1:
2533@example
2534--foo.h
2535extern int arr[];
2536--foo.c
2537#include "foo.h"
2538void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2539 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2540 volatile int *parr = arr;
2541 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2542@}
2543@end example
2544
2545Solution 2:
2546@example
2547--foo.h
2548/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2549#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2550 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2551#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2552#else
2553#define FOO_IMPORT
2554#endif
2555extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2556--foo.c
2557#include "foo.h"
2558void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2559 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2560@}
2561@end example
2562
c0065db7 2563A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
0d888aac
CW
2564library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2565for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2566functions).
bb10df36 2567[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2568
2569@kindex --disable-auto-import
2570@item --disable-auto-import
c0065db7 2571Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
b044cda1 2572@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2573[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2574
2fa9fc65
NC
2575@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2576@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2577If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2578that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2579a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
c0065db7 2580environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
bb10df36 2581[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65
NC
2582
2583@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2584@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2585Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
676ee43b 2586DLLs.
bb10df36 2587[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65 2588
b044cda1
CW
2589@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2590@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2591Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
bb10df36 2592[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2593
252b5132
RH
2594@kindex --section-alignment
2595@item --section-alignment
2596Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2597addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
bb10df36 2598[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2599
2600@cindex stack size
2601@kindex --stack
2602@item --stack @var{reserve}
2603@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2604Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2605to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2606committed.
bb10df36 2607[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2608
2609@kindex --subsystem
2610@item --subsystem @var{which}
2611@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2612@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2613Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2614legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
33f362e1
NC
2615@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2616the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2617@var{which}.
bb10df36 2618[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2619
2f563b51
DK
2620The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2621of the PE file header:
2622[These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2623
2624@kindex --dynamicbase
2625@item --dynamicbase
2626The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2627randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2628Vista for i386 PE targets.
2629
2630@kindex --forceinteg
2631@item --forceinteg
2632Code integrity checks are enforced.
2633
2634@kindex --nxcompat
2635@item --nxcompat
2636The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2637This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2638
2639@kindex --no-isolation
2640@item --no-isolation
2641Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2642
2643@kindex --no-seh
2644@item --no-seh
2645The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2646this image.
2647
2648@kindex --no-bind
2649@item --no-bind
2650Do not bind this image.
2651
2652@kindex --wdmdriver
2653@item --wdmdriver
2654The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
9d5777a3 2655
2f563b51
DK
2656@kindex --tsaware
2657@item --tsaware
2658The image is Terminal Server aware.
2659
0cb112f7
CF
2660@kindex --insert-timestamp
2661@item --insert-timestamp
2662Insert a real timestamp into the image, rather than the default value
2663of zero. This will result in a slightly different results with each
2664invocation, which could be helpful for distributing unique images.
252b5132
RH
2665@end table
2666
0285c67d
NC
2667@c man end
2668
ac145307
BS
2669@ifset C6X
2670@subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
2671
2672@c man begin OPTIONS
2673
2674The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
2675libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
2676all executables use an index of 0.
2677
2678@table @gcctabopt
2679
2680@kindex --dsbt-size
2681@item --dsbt-size @var{size}
2682This option sets the number of entires in the DSBT of the current executable
2683or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
2684entries.
2685
2686@kindex --dsbt-index
2687@item --dsbt-index @var{index}
2688This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
2689to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
2690executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
2691@code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
2692
fbd9ad90
PB
2693@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
2694The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
2695exidx entries in frame unwind info.
2696
ac145307
BS
2697@end table
2698
2699@c man end
2700@end ifset
2701
93fd0973
SC
2702@ifset M68HC11
2703@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2704
2705@c man begin OPTIONS
2706
2707The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2708memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2709
2710@table @gcctabopt
2711
2712@kindex --no-trampoline
2713@item --no-trampoline
2714This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2715is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2716instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2717
2718@kindex --bank-window
2719@item --bank-window @var{name}
2720This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
2721the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
2722The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
2723paging and addresses within the memory window.
2724
2725@end table
2726
2727@c man end
2728@end ifset
2729
7fb9f789
NC
2730@ifset M68K
2731@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
2732
2733@c man begin OPTIONS
2734
2735The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
2736when linking for 68K targets.
2737
2738@table @gcctabopt
2739
2740@kindex --got
2741@item --got=@var{type}
2742This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
2743@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
2744@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
2745Info entry for @file{ld}.
2746
2747@end table
2748
2749@c man end
2750@end ifset
2751
833794fc
MR
2752@ifset MIPS
2753@subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
2754
2755@c man begin OPTIONS
2756
2757The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
2758generation when linking for MIPS targets.
2759
2760@table @gcctabopt
2761
2762@kindex --insn32
2763@item --insn32
2764@kindex --no-insn32
2765@itemx --no-insn32
2766These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
2767generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
2768or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
276932-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
2770used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
2771possible.
2772
2773@end table
2774
2775@c man end
2776@end ifset
2777
252b5132
RH
2778@ifset UsesEnvVars
2779@node Environment
2780@section Environment Variables
2781
0285c67d
NC
2782@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
2783
560e09e9 2784You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
36f63dca
NC
2785@ifclear SingleFormat
2786@code{GNUTARGET},
2787@end ifclear
2788@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
252b5132 2789
36f63dca 2790@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
2791@kindex GNUTARGET
2792@cindex default input format
2793@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
2794use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
2795of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
ff5dcc92 2796@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
252b5132
RH
2797of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
2798attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
2799this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
2800there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
2801object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
2802BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
2803in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
36f63dca 2804@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
2805
2806@kindex LDEMULATION
2807@cindex default emulation
2808@cindex emulation, default
2809@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
2810@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
2811behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
2812available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
2813the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
2814variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
2815linker was configured.
252b5132
RH
2816
2817@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
2818@cindex demangling, default
2819Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
2820@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
2821default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
2822a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
2823may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
2824options.
2825
0285c67d
NC
2826@c man end
2827@end ifset
2828
252b5132
RH
2829@node Scripts
2830@chapter Linker Scripts
2831
2832@cindex scripts
2833@cindex linker scripts
2834@cindex command files
2835Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
2836written in the linker command language.
2837
2838The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
2839the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
2840the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
2841more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
2842direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
2843described below.
2844
2845The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
2846yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
2847linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
2848to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
2849such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
2850
2851You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
2852line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
2853default linker script.
2854
2855You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
2856to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
2857Linker Scripts}.
2858
2859@menu
2860* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
2861* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
2862* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
2863* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
2864* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
2865* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
2866* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
2867* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
2868* VERSION:: VERSION Command
2869* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
2870* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
2871@end menu
2872
2873@node Basic Script Concepts
2874@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
2875@cindex linker script concepts
2876We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
2877describe the linker script language.
2878
2879The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
2880file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
2881@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
2882The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
2883purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
2884among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
2885section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
2886in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
2887
2888Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
2889also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
56dd11f0 2890contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
252b5132
RH
2891the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
2892A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
2893area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
2894loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
2895which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
2896of debugging information.
2897
2898Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
2899first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
2900the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
2901@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
2902section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
2903same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
2904is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
2905(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
2906based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
2907RAM address would be the VMA.
2908
2909You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
2910program with the @samp{-h} option.
2911
2912Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
2913@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
2914has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
2915information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
2916will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
2917static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
2918referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
2919
2920You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
2921program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
2922option.
2923
2924@node Script Format
2925@section Linker Script Format
2926@cindex linker script format
2927Linker scripts are text files.
2928
2929You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
2930either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
2931symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
2932generally ignored.
2933
2934Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
2935If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
2936otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
2937double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
2938file name.
2939
2940You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
2941@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
2942to whitespace.
2943
2944@node Simple Example
2945@section Simple Linker Script Example
2946@cindex linker script example
2947@cindex example of linker script
2948Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
2949
2950The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
2951@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
2952memory layout of the output file.
2953
2954The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
2955describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
2956code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
2957@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
2958Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
2959your input files.
2960
2961For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
29620x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
2963linker script which will do that:
2964@smallexample
2965SECTIONS
2966@{
2967 . = 0x10000;
2968 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
2969 . = 0x8000000;
2970 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
2971 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
2972@}
2973@end smallexample
2974
2975You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
2976followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
2977descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
2978
252b5132
RH
2979The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
2980sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
2981counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
2982other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
2983current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
2984incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
2985@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
2986
2987The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
2988required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
2989after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
2990which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
2991wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
2992means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
2993
2994Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
2995@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
2996@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
2997
2998The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
2999the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3000at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3001output section, the value of the location counter will be
3002@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3003effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
58434bc1 3004immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
252b5132
RH
3005
3006The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3007alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3008example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3009sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3010may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3011sections.
3012
3013That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3014
3015@node Simple Commands
3016@section Simple Linker Script Commands
3017@cindex linker script simple commands
3018In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3019
3020@menu
3021* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3022* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3023@ifclear SingleFormat
3024* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3025@end ifclear
3026
4a93e180 3027* REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
252b5132
RH
3028* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3029@end menu
3030
3031@node Entry Point
36f63dca 3032@subsection Setting the Entry Point
252b5132
RH
3033@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3034@cindex start of execution
3035@cindex first instruction
3036@cindex entry point
3037The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3038point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3039entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3040@smallexample
3041ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3042@end smallexample
3043
3044There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3045entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3046stopping when one of them succeeds:
3047@itemize @bullet
a1ab1d2a 3048@item
252b5132 3049the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
a1ab1d2a 3050@item
252b5132 3051the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
a1ab1d2a 3052@item
3ab904c4
NC
3053the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
3054targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
3055check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
a1ab1d2a 3056@item
252b5132 3057the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
a1ab1d2a 3058@item
252b5132
RH
3059The address @code{0}.
3060@end itemize
3061
3062@node File Commands
36f63dca 3063@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
252b5132
RH
3064@cindex linker script file commands
3065Several linker script commands deal with files.
3066
3067@table @code
3068@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3069@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3070@cindex including a linker script
3071Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3072be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
ff5dcc92 3073with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
252b5132
RH
307410 levels deep.
3075
4006703d
NS
3076You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3077@code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3078
252b5132
RH
3079@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3080@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3081@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3082@cindex input files in linker scripts
3083@cindex input object files in linker scripts
3084@cindex linker script input object files
3085The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3086in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3087
3088For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3089a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3090then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3091
3092In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3093script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3094
e3f2db7f
AO
3095In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3096with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3097located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3098for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3099open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
3100linker will search through the archive library search path. See the
3101description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
252b5132 3102
ff5dcc92 3103If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
252b5132
RH
3104name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
3105@samp{-l}.
3106
3107When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3108files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3109script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3110
3111@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3112@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3113@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3114@cindex grouping input files
3115The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3116files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3117new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3118in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3119
b717d30e
JJ
3120@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3121@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3122@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3123This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3124commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3125as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3126with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3127when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3128@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3129and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3130setting afterwards.
3131
252b5132
RH
3132@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3133@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
b45619c0 3134@cindex output file name in linker script
252b5132
RH
3135The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3136@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3137@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3138Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
3139precedence.
3140
3141You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3142output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3143
3144@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3145@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3146@cindex library search path in linker script
3147@cindex archive search path in linker script
3148@cindex search path in linker script
3149The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
ff5dcc92 3150@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
252b5132
RH
3151@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3152on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
3153are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3154the command line option are searched first.
3155
3156@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3157@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3158@cindex first input file
3159The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3160that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3161though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3162when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3163first file.
3164@end table
3165
3166@ifclear SingleFormat
3167@node Format Commands
36f63dca 3168@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
252b5132
RH
3169A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3170
3171@table @code
3172@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3173@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3174@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3175@cindex output file format in linker script
3176The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3177output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
024531e2 3178exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
252b5132
RH
3179(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3180line option takes precedence.
3181
3182You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3183formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3184This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3185desired endianness.
3186
3187If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3188will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3189output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3190used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3191
3192For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3193command:
3194@smallexample
3195OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3196@end smallexample
3197This says that the default format for the output file is
3198@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3199option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3200format.
3201
3202@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3203@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3204@cindex input file format in linker script
3205The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3206files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3207This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3208(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3209is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3210command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3211@end table
3212@end ifclear
3213
4a93e180
NC
3214@node REGION_ALIAS
3215@subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3216@kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3217@cindex region alias
3218@cindex region names
3219
3220Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3221@ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3222
3223@smallexample
3224REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3225@end smallexample
3226
3227The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3228memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3229to memory regions. An example follows.
3230
3231Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3232memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3233that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3234non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3235access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3236read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3237sections:
3238
3239@itemize @bullet
3240@item
3241@code{.text} program code;
3242@item
3243@code{.rodata} read-only data;
3244@item
3245@code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3246@item
3247@code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3248@end itemize
3249
3250The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3251part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3252output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3253systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3254@code{C}:
3255@multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3256@item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
9d5777a3 3257@item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
4a93e180
NC
3258@item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3259@item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3260@item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3261@end multitable
3262The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3263loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3264the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3265the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3266
3267The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3268includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3269memory layout:
3270@smallexample
3271INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3272
3273SECTIONS
3274 @{
3275 .text :
3276 @{
3277 *(.text)
3278 @} > REGION_TEXT
3279 .rodata :
3280 @{
3281 *(.rodata)
3282 rodata_end = .;
3283 @} > REGION_RODATA
3284 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3285 @{
3286 data_start = .;
3287 *(.data)
3288 @} > REGION_DATA
3289 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3290 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3291 .bss :
3292 @{
3293 *(.bss)
3294 @} > REGION_BSS
3295 @}
3296@end smallexample
3297
3298Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3299regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3300variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3301@table @code
3302@item A
3303Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3304@smallexample
3305MEMORY
3306 @{
3307 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3308 @}
3309
3310REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3311REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3312REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3313REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3314@end smallexample
3315@item B
3316Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3317into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3318@code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3319@smallexample
3320MEMORY
3321 @{
3322 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3323 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3324 @}
3325
3326REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3327REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3328REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3329REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3330@end smallexample
3331@item C
3332Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3333@code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3334initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3335system start into the @code{RAM}.
3336@smallexample
3337MEMORY
3338 @{
3339 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3340 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3341 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3342 @}
3343
3344REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3345REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3346REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3347REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3348@end smallexample
3349@end table
3350
3351It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3352@code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3353necessary:
3354@smallexample
3355#include <string.h>
3356
3357extern char data_start [];
3358extern char data_size [];
3359extern char data_load_start [];
3360
3361void copy_data(void)
3362@{
3363 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3364 @{
3365 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3366 @}
3367@}
3368@end smallexample
3369
252b5132 3370@node Miscellaneous Commands
36f63dca 3371@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
252b5132
RH
3372There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3373
3374@table @code
3375@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3376@kindex ASSERT
3377@cindex assertion in linker script
3378Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3379with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3380
3381@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3382@kindex EXTERN
3383@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3384Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3385symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3386modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3387each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3388command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3389
3390@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3391@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3392@cindex common allocation in linker script
3393This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
ff5dcc92 3394to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
252b5132
RH
3395output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3396
4818e05f
AM
3397@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3398@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3399@cindex common allocation in linker script
3400This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3401command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3402to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3403
53d25da6
AM
3404@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3405@kindex INSERT
3406@cindex insert user script into default script
3407This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3408augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3409inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3410@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3411default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3412sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3413linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3414insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3415linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3416default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3417of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3418to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3419is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3420
3421@smallexample
3422SECTIONS
3423@{
3424 OVERLAY :
3425 @{
3426 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3427 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3428 @}
3429@}
3430INSERT AFTER .text;
3431@end smallexample
3432
252b5132
RH
3433@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3434@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3435@cindex cross references
ff5dcc92 3436This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
252b5132
RH
3437references among certain output sections.
3438
3439In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3440using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3441will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3442errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3443a function defined in the other section.
3444
3445The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
ff5dcc92 3446@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
252b5132
RH
3447an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3448@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3449names.
3450
3451@ifclear SingleFormat
3452@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3453@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3454@cindex machine architecture
3455@cindex architecture
3456Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3457of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3458architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3459the @samp{-f} option.
3460@end ifclear
01554a74
AM
3461
3462@item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3463@kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3464This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3465@var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3466in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3467@xref{Expression Section}.
252b5132
RH
3468@end table
3469
3470@node Assignments
3471@section Assigning Values to Symbols
3472@cindex assignment in scripts
3473@cindex symbol definition, scripts
3474@cindex variables, defining
3475You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
73ae6183 3476the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
252b5132
RH
3477
3478@menu
3479* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
eb8476a6 3480* HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
252b5132 3481* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
7af8e998 3482* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
73ae6183 3483* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
252b5132
RH
3484@end menu
3485
3486@node Simple Assignments
3487@subsection Simple Assignments
3488
3489You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3490
3491@table @code
3492@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3493@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3494@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3495@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3496@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3497@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3498@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3499@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3500@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3501@end table
3502
3503The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3504@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3505defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3506
3507The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
b5666f2f 3508may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
252b5132
RH
3509
3510The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3511
3512Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3513
3514You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3515statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3516section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3517
3518The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3519expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3520
3521Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3522assignments may be used:
3523
3524@smallexample
3525floating_point = 0;
3526SECTIONS
3527@{
3528 .text :
3529 @{
3530 *(.text)
3531 _etext = .;
3532 @}
156e34dd 3533 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
252b5132
RH
3534 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3535@}
3536@end smallexample
3537@noindent
3538In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3539zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3540the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3541defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3542upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3543
eb8476a6
MR
3544@node HIDDEN
3545@subsection HIDDEN
3546@cindex HIDDEN
3547For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
3548exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3549
3550Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
3551@code{HIDDEN}:
3552
3553@smallexample
3554HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
3555SECTIONS
3556@{
3557 .text :
3558 @{
3559 *(.text)
3560 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
3561 @}
3562 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
3563 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3564@}
3565@end smallexample
3566@noindent
3567In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
3568
252b5132
RH
3569@node PROVIDE
3570@subsection PROVIDE
3571@cindex PROVIDE
3572In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3573only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3574the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3575@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3576@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3577@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3578@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3579@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3580
3581Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3582@smallexample
3583SECTIONS
3584@{
3585 .text :
3586 @{
3587 *(.text)
3588 _etext = .;
3589 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3590 @}
3591@}
3592@end smallexample
3593
3594In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3595underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3596the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3597underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3598If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3599linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3600
7af8e998
L
3601@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3602@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3603@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3604Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3605hidden and won't be exported.
3606
73ae6183
NC
3607@node Source Code Reference
3608@subsection Source Code Reference
3609
3610Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3611intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3612a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3613symbol that does not have a value.
3614
3615Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3616transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3617stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3618prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3619mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3620of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3621variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3622linker script variable might be referred to as:
3623
3624@smallexample
3625 extern int foo;
3626@end smallexample
3627
3628But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3629
3630@smallexample
3631 _foo = 1000;
3632@end smallexample
3633
3634In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3635transformation has taken place.
3636
3637When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3638things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3639in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
3640second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3641table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
3642contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3643value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3644
3645@smallexample
3646 int foo = 1000;
3647@end smallexample
3648
10bf6894 3649creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
73ae6183
NC
3650holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3651number 1000 is initially stored.
3652
3653When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3654first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
3655memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
3656So:
3657
3658@smallexample
3659 foo = 1;
3660@end smallexample
3661
3662looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
3663associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
3664address. Whereas:
3665
3666@smallexample
3667 int * a = & foo;
3668@end smallexample
3669
10bf6894 3670looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
73ae6183
NC
3671and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
3672the variable @samp{a}.
3673
3674Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
3675the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
3676an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
3677
3678@smallexample
3679 foo = 1000;
3680@end smallexample
3681
3682creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
3683the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
3684address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
3685linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
3686access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
3687
3688Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
3689you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
3690use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
3691section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
3692linker script contains these declarations:
3693
3694@smallexample
3695@group
3696 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
3697 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM) - 1;
3698 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
3699@end group
3700@end smallexample
3701
3702Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
3703
3704@smallexample
3705@group
3706 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
c0065db7 3707
73ae6183
NC
3708 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
3709@end group
3710@end smallexample
3711
3712Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
3713
252b5132 3714@node SECTIONS
36f63dca 3715@section SECTIONS Command
252b5132
RH
3716@kindex SECTIONS
3717The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
3718into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
3719
3720The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
3721@smallexample
3722SECTIONS
3723@{
3724 @var{sections-command}
3725 @var{sections-command}
3726 @dots{}
3727@}
3728@end smallexample
3729
3730Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
3731
3732@itemize @bullet
3733@item
3734an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
3735@item
3736a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3737@item
3738an output section description
3739@item
3740an overlay description
3741@end itemize
3742
3743The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
3744@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
3745those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
3746understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
3747the layout of the output file.
3748
3749Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
3750below.
3751
3752If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
3753linker will place each input section into an identically named output
3754section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
3755input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
3756example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
3757in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
3758
3759@menu
3760* Output Section Description:: Output section description
3761* Output Section Name:: Output section name
3762* Output Section Address:: Output section address
3763* Input Section:: Input section description
3764* Output Section Data:: Output section data
3765* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
3766* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
3767* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
3768* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
3769@end menu
3770
3771@node Output Section Description
36f63dca 3772@subsection Output Section Description
252b5132
RH
3773The full description of an output section looks like this:
3774@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 3775@group
7e7d5768 3776@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759 3777 [AT(@var{lma})]
1eec346e 3778 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
0c71d759
NC
3779 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
3780 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
3781 @{
3782 @var{output-section-command}
3783 @var{output-section-command}
3784 @dots{}
562d3460 3785 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
3786@end group
3787@end smallexample
3788
3789Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
3790
3791The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
3792name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
3793The line breaks and other white space are optional.
3794
3795Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
3796
3797@itemize @bullet
3798@item
3799a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3800@item
3801an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
3802@item
3803data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
3804@item
3805a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
3806@end itemize
3807
3808@node Output Section Name
36f63dca 3809@subsection Output Section Name
252b5132
RH
3810@cindex name, section
3811@cindex section name
3812The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
3813meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
3814support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
3815must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
3816example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
3817output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
3818names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
3819quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
3820characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
3821commas must be quoted.
3822
3823The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
3824Discarding}.
3825
3826@node Output Section Address
2a16d82a 3827@subsection Output Section Address
252b5132
RH
3828@cindex address, section
3829@cindex section address
3830The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
ea5cae92
NC
3831address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
3832is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
3833
3834If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
3835section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
3836to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
3837alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
3838contained within the output section.
3839
3840The output section address heuristic is as follows:
3841
3842@itemize @bullet
3843@item
3844If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
3845is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
3846in that region.
3847
3848@item
3849If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
3850regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
3851section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
3852be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
3853
3854@item
3855If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
3856the output address will be based on the current value of the location
3857counter.
3858@end itemize
3859
3860@noindent
3861For example:
3862
252b5132
RH
3863@smallexample
3864.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
3865@end smallexample
ea5cae92 3866
252b5132
RH
3867@noindent
3868and
ea5cae92 3869
252b5132
RH
3870@smallexample
3871.text : @{ *(.text) @}
3872@end smallexample
ea5cae92 3873
252b5132
RH
3874@noindent
3875are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
3876@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
3877counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
ea5cae92
NC
3878counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
3879input sections.
252b5132
RH
3880
3881The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
3882For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
3883so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
3884do something like this:
3885@smallexample
3886.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
3887@end smallexample
3888@noindent
3889This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
3890aligned upward to the specified value.
3891
3892Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
6ce340f1
NC
3893location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
3894sections are ignored).
252b5132
RH
3895
3896@node Input Section
36f63dca 3897@subsection Input Section Description
252b5132
RH
3898@cindex input sections
3899@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
3900The most common output section command is an input section description.
3901
3902The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
3903You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
3904in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
3905map the input files into your memory layout.
3906
3907@menu
3908* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
3909* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
3910* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
3911* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
3912* Input Section Example:: Input section example
3913@end menu
3914
3915@node Input Section Basics
36f63dca 3916@subsubsection Input Section Basics
252b5132
RH
3917@cindex input section basics
3918An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
3919by a list of section names in parentheses.
3920
3921The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
3922describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
3923
3924The most common input section description is to include all input
3925sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
3926include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
3927@smallexample
3928*(.text)
3929@end smallexample
3930@noindent
18625d54
CM
3931Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
3932of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
3933match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
3934example:
252b5132 3935@smallexample
b4346c09 3936*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
252b5132 3937@end smallexample
765b7cbe
JB
3938will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o} and
3939@file{otherfile.o} to be included.
252b5132
RH
3940
3941There are two ways to include more than one section:
3942@smallexample
3943*(.text .rdata)
3944*(.text) *(.rdata)
3945@end smallexample
3946@noindent
3947The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
3948@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
b6bf44ba
AM
3949first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
3950they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
252b5132
RH
3951@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
3952@samp{.rdata} input sections.
3953
3954You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
3955You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
3956needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
3957@smallexample
3958data.o(.data)
3959@end smallexample
3960
ae17ab41
CM
3961To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
3962of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
3963
3964Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
3965
3966@smallexample
3967@group
3968SECTIONS @{
3969 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
3970 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
3971@}
3972@end group
3973@end smallexample
3974
3975In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
3976input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
3977@code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
3978@samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
3979whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
3980
967928e9
AM
3981You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
3982matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
3983with no whitespace around the colon.
3984
3985@table @samp
3986@item archive:file
3987matches file within archive
3988@item archive:
3989matches the whole archive
3990@item :file
3991matches file but not one in an archive
3992@end table
3993
3994Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
3995wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
3996single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
3997@samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
3998within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
3999also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4000other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4001from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4002command.
4003
252b5132
RH
4004If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4005the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4006commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4007@smallexample
4008data.o
4009@end smallexample
4010
967928e9
AM
4011When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4012and does not contain any wild card
252b5132
RH
4013characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4014name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4015did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4016though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4017@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4018the archive search path.
4019
4020@node Input Section Wildcards
36f63dca 4021@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
252b5132
RH
4022@cindex input section wildcards
4023@cindex wildcard file name patterns
4024@cindex file name wildcard patterns
4025@cindex section name wildcard patterns
4026In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4027name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4028
4029The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4030pattern for the file name.
4031
4032The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4033
4034@table @samp
4035@item *
4036matches any number of characters
4037@item ?
4038matches any single character
4039@item [@var{chars}]
4040matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4041character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4042@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4043@item \
4044quotes the following character
4045@end table
4046
4047When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4048will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4049Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4050exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4051@samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4052a @samp{/} character.
4053
4054File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4055specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4056does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4057
4058If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4059appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4060will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4061sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4062@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4063@smallexample
4064.data : @{ *(.data) @}
4065.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4066@end smallexample
4067
bcaa7b3e 4068@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
252b5132
RH
4069Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4070in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
bcaa7b3e
L
4071this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4072pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4073@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
252b5132
RH
4074into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4075
bcaa7b3e
L
4076@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4077@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4078difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
1ae5c3ae 4079descending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
ee83b8a6
NC
4080Larger alignments are placed before smaller alignments in order to
4081reduce the amount of padding necessary.
bcaa7b3e 4082
02ecc8e9
L
4083@cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4084@code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4085difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
4086ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
4087encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
4088
bcaa7b3e
L
4089@cindex SORT
4090@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4091
4092When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4093can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4094
4095@enumerate
4096@item
4097@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4098It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4099sections have the same name.
4100@item
4101@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4102It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4103sections have the same alignment.
4104@item
c0065db7 4105@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
bcaa7b3e
L
4106treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4107@item
4108@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4109is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4110@item
4111All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4112@end enumerate
4113
4114When both command line section sorting option and linker script
4115section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4116takes precedence over the command line option.
4117
4118If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4119command line option will make the section sorting command to be
4120treated as nested sorting command.
4121
4122@enumerate
4123@item
4124@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4125@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4126@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4127@item
4128@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4129@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4130@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4131@end enumerate
4132
4133If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4134command line option will be ignored.
4135
eda680f8
L
4136@cindex SORT_NONE
4137@code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command line
4138section sorting option.
4139
252b5132
RH
4140If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4141@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4142precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4143
4144This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4145files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4146sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4147The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4148with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4149linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4150@smallexample
4151@group
4152SECTIONS @{
4153 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4154 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4155 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4156 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4157@}
4158@end group
4159@end smallexample
4160
4161@node Input Section Common
36f63dca 4162@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
252b5132
RH
4163@cindex common symbol placement
4164@cindex uninitialized data placement
4165A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4166file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4167linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4168named @samp{COMMON}.
4169
4170You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4171other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4172particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4173input files are placed in another section.
4174
4175In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4176@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4177@smallexample
4178.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4179@end smallexample
4180
4181@cindex scommon section
4182@cindex small common symbols
4183Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4184example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4185symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4186different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4187the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4188symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4189to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4190locations.
4191
4192@cindex [COMMON]
4193You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4194notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4195@samp{*(COMMON)}.
4196
4197@node Input Section Keep
36f63dca 4198@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
252b5132
RH
4199@cindex KEEP
4200@cindex garbage collection
4201When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
a1ab1d2a 4202it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
252b5132
RH
4203This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4204with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
bcaa7b3e 4205@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
252b5132
RH
4206
4207@node Input Section Example
36f63dca 4208@subsubsection Input Section Example
252b5132
RH
4209The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4210to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4211start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4212@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4213follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4214@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4215@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4216All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4217files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4218
4219@smallexample
4220@group
4221SECTIONS @{
4222 outputa 0x10000 :
4223 @{
4224 all.o
4225 foo.o (.input1)
4226 @}
36f63dca
NC
4227@end group
4228@group
252b5132
RH
4229 outputb :
4230 @{
4231 foo.o (.input2)
4232 foo1.o (.input1)
4233 @}
36f63dca
NC
4234@end group
4235@group
252b5132
RH
4236 outputc :
4237 @{
4238 *(.input1)
4239 *(.input2)
4240 @}
4241@}
4242@end group
a1ab1d2a 4243@end smallexample
252b5132
RH
4244
4245@node Output Section Data
36f63dca 4246@subsection Output Section Data
252b5132
RH
4247@cindex data
4248@cindex section data
4249@cindex output section data
4250@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4251@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4252@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4253@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4254@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4255You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4256@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4257an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4258parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4259value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4260counter.
4261
4262The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4263store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4264bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4265stored.
4266
4267For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4268of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4269@smallexample
4270BYTE(1)
4271LONG(addr)
4272@end smallexample
4273
4274When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4275same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4276target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4277@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4278@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4279
4280If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4281which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4282When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4283true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4284endianness of the first input object file.
4285
36f63dca 4286Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
2b5fc1f5
NC
4287between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4288@smallexample
4289SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4290@end smallexample
4291whereas this will work:
4292@smallexample
4293SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4294@end smallexample
4295
252b5132
RH
4296@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4297@cindex holes, filling
4298@cindex unspecified memory
4299You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4300current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4301otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4302gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
a139d329 4303with the value of the expression, repeated as
252b5132
RH
4304necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4305point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4306than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4307different parts of an output section.
4308
4309This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
563e308f 4310value @samp{0x90}:
252b5132 4311@smallexample
563e308f 4312FILL(0x90909090)
252b5132
RH
4313@end smallexample
4314
4315The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
9673c93c 4316section attribute, but it only affects the
252b5132
RH
4317part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4318entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
9673c93c 4319precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
a139d329 4320expression.
252b5132
RH
4321
4322@node Output Section Keywords
36f63dca 4323@subsection Output Section Keywords
252b5132
RH
4324There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4325commands.
4326
4327@table @code
4328@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4329@cindex input filename symbols
4330@cindex filename symbols
4331@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4332The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4333The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4334file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4335the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4336
4337This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4338normally used for any other object file format.
4339
4340@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4341@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4342@cindex constructors, arranging in link
4343@item CONSTRUCTORS
4344When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4345unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4346destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4347arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4348automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4349For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4350linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4351@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4352ignored for other object file formats.
4353
4354The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
7e69709c
AM
4355constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4356Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4357the start and end of the global destructors. The
252b5132
RH
4358first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4359of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4360compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4361formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4362@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4363the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4364destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4365@code{exit}.
4366
4367For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4368arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4369addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4370and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4371linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4372runtime code expects to see.
4373
4374@smallexample
4375 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4376 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4377 *(.ctors)
4378 LONG(0)
4379 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4380 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4381 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4382 *(.dtors)
4383 LONG(0)
4384 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4385@end smallexample
4386
4387If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4388which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4389are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4390are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
bcaa7b3e
L
4391command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4392@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4393@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
252b5132
RH
4394@samp{*(.dtors)}.
4395
4396Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4397and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4398need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4399scripts.
4400
4401@end table
4402
4403@node Output Section Discarding
36f63dca 4404@subsection Output Section Discarding
252b5132
RH
4405@cindex discarding sections
4406@cindex sections, discarding
4407@cindex removing sections
74541ad4
AM
4408The linker will not create output sections with no contents. This is
4409for convenience when referring to input sections that may or may not
4410be present in any of the input files. For example:
252b5132 4411@smallexample
49c13adb 4412.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
252b5132
RH
4413@end smallexample
4414@noindent
4415will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
74541ad4
AM
4416@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4417sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
4418space in an output section will also create the output section.
4419
a0976ea4 4420The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
74541ad4
AM
4421on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4422symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
a0976ea4
AM
4423the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4424section is discarded.
252b5132
RH
4425
4426@cindex /DISCARD/
4427The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4428input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4429section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4430
4431@node Output Section Attributes
36f63dca 4432@subsection Output Section Attributes
252b5132
RH
4433@cindex output section attributes
4434We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4435like this:
0c71d759 4436
252b5132 4437@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4438@group
7e7d5768 4439@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759
NC
4440 [AT(@var{lma})]
4441 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4442 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4443 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4444 @{
4445 @var{output-section-command}
4446 @var{output-section-command}
4447 @dots{}
562d3460 4448 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
4449@end group
4450@end smallexample
0c71d759 4451
252b5132
RH
4452We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4453@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4454remaining section attributes.
4455
a1ab1d2a 4456@menu
252b5132
RH
4457* Output Section Type:: Output section type
4458* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
bbf115d3 4459* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
7e7d5768 4460* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
0c71d759 4461* Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
252b5132
RH
4462* Output Section Region:: Output section region
4463* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4464* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4465@end menu
4466
4467@node Output Section Type
36f63dca 4468@subsubsection Output Section Type
252b5132
RH
4469Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4470parentheses. The following types are defined:
4471
4472@table @code
4473@item NOLOAD
4474The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4475loaded into memory when the program is run.
4476@item DSECT
4477@itemx COPY
4478@itemx INFO
4479@itemx OVERLAY
4480These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4481rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4482marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4483section when the program is run.
4484@end table
4485
4486@kindex NOLOAD
4487@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4488@cindex loading, preventing
4489The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4490the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4491the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4492@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
2e76e85a 4493need to be loaded when the program is run.
252b5132
RH
4494@smallexample
4495@group
4496SECTIONS @{
4497 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4498 @dots{}
4499@}
4500@end group
4501@end smallexample
4502
4503@node Output Section LMA
36f63dca 4504@subsubsection Output Section LMA
562d3460 4505@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
252b5132
RH
4506@kindex AT(@var{lma})
4507@cindex load address
4508@cindex section load address
4509Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
ea5cae92
NC
4510@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4511@pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
4512specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
4513address is optional.
6bdafbeb 4514
ea5cae92
NC
4515The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
4516specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
4517takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
4518load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
4519region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
dc0b6aa0
AM
4520
4521If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
ea5cae92
NC
4522section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
4523load address:
4524
4525@itemize @bullet
4526@item
4527If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
4528the LMA address as well.
4529
4530@item
4531If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
4532
4533@item
4534Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
4535with the current section, and this region contains at least one
4536section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
4537VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
4538the last section in the located region.
4539
4540@item
4541If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
4542that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
4543
4544@item
4545If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
4546section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
4547@end itemize
252b5132
RH
4548
4549@cindex ROM initialized data
4550@cindex initialized data in ROM
4551This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4552example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4553called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4554@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4555even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4556uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
4557defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
4558counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
4559
4560@smallexample
4561@group
4562SECTIONS
4563 @{
4564 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
a1ab1d2a 4565 .mdata 0x2000 :
252b5132
RH
4566 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
4567 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
4568 .bss 0x3000 :
4569 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
4570@}
4571@end group
4572@end smallexample
4573
4574The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
4575this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
4576the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
4577how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
4578script.
4579
4580@smallexample
4581@group
4582extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
4583char *src = &_etext;
4584char *dst = &_data;
4585
ea5cae92
NC
4586/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
4587while (dst < &_edata)
252b5132 4588 *dst++ = *src++;
252b5132 4589
ea5cae92 4590/* Zero bss. */
252b5132
RH
4591for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
4592 *dst = 0;
4593@end group
4594@end smallexample
4595
bbf115d3
L
4596@node Forced Output Alignment
4597@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
4598@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
4599@cindex forcing output section alignment
4600@cindex output section alignment
1eec346e
NC
4601You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
4602alternative you can force the output section alignment to the maximum alignment
4603of all its input sections with ALIGN_WITH_INPUT. The alignment forced by
4604ALIGN_WITH_INPUT is used even in case the load and virtual memory regions are
4605different.
bbf115d3 4606
7e7d5768
AM
4607@node Forced Input Alignment
4608@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
4609@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
4610@cindex forcing input section alignment
4611@cindex input section alignment
4612You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
4613SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
4614sections, whether larger or smaller.
4615
0c71d759
NC
4616@node Output Section Constraint
4617@subsubsection Output Section Constraint
4618@kindex ONLY_IF_RO
4619@kindex ONLY_IF_RW
4620@cindex constraints on output sections
4621You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
4622of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
4623read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
4624@code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
4625
252b5132 4626@node Output Section Region
36f63dca 4627@subsubsection Output Section Region
252b5132
RH
4628@kindex >@var{region}
4629@cindex section, assigning to memory region
4630@cindex memory regions and sections
4631You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
4632using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
4633
4634Here is a simple example:
4635@smallexample
4636@group
4637MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
4638SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
4639@end group
4640@end smallexample
4641
4642@node Output Section Phdr
36f63dca 4643@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
252b5132
RH
4644@kindex :@var{phdr}
4645@cindex section, assigning to program header
4646@cindex program headers and sections
4647You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
4648using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
4649one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
4650assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
4651@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
4652linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
4653
4654Here is a simple example:
4655@smallexample
4656@group
4657PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
4658SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
4659@end group
4660@end smallexample
4661
4662@node Output Section Fill
36f63dca 4663@subsubsection Output Section Fill
252b5132
RH
4664@kindex =@var{fillexp}
4665@cindex section fill pattern
4666@cindex fill pattern, entire section
4667You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
4668@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
4669(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
4670within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
a139d329
AM
4671alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
4672necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
9673c93c 4673of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
a139d329
AM
4674an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
4675fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
9673c93c 4676other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
a139d329
AM
4677pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
4678expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
252b5132
RH
4679
4680You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
9673c93c 4681output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
252b5132
RH
4682
4683Here is a simple example:
4684@smallexample
4685@group
563e308f 4686SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
252b5132
RH
4687@end group
4688@end smallexample
4689
4690@node Overlay Description
36f63dca 4691@subsection Overlay Description
252b5132
RH
4692@kindex OVERLAY
4693@cindex overlays
4694An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
4695are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
4696the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
4697copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
4698required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
4699can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
4700than another.
4701
4702Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
4703@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
4704output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
4705command is as follows:
4706@smallexample
4707@group
4708OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
4709 @{
4710 @var{secname1}
4711 @{
4712 @var{output-section-command}
4713 @var{output-section-command}
4714 @dots{}
4715 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4716 @var{secname2}
4717 @{
4718 @var{output-section-command}
4719 @var{output-section-command}
4720 @dots{}
4721 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4722 @dots{}
4723 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4724@end group
4725@end smallexample
4726
4727Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
4728section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
4729section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
11e7fd74 4730those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
252b5132
RH
4731except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
4732sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
4733
4734The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
4735addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
4736memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
4737whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
4738and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
4739and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
4740
56dd11f0
NC
4741If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
4742references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
4743the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
4744sense for one section to refer directly to another.
4745@xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
252b5132
RH
4746
4747For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
34711ca3 4748provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
252b5132
RH
4749defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
4750@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
4751the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
4752within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
4753symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
4754
4755At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
4756the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
4757
4758Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
4759@code{SECTIONS} construct.
4760@smallexample
4761@group
4762 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
4763 @{
4764 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4765 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4766 @}
4767@end group
4768@end smallexample
4769@noindent
4770This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
4771address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
4772@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
34711ca3 4773following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
252b5132
RH
4774@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
4775@code{__load_stop_text1}.
4776
4777C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
4778like the following.
4779
4780@smallexample
4781@group
4782 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
4783 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
4784 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
4785@end group
4786@end smallexample
4787
4788Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
4789everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
4790example could have been written identically as follows.
4791
4792@smallexample
4793@group
4794 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4795 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
4796 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
252b5132 4797 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4798 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
4799 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
252b5132
RH
4800 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
4801@end group
4802@end smallexample
4803
4804@node MEMORY
36f63dca 4805@section MEMORY Command
252b5132
RH
4806@kindex MEMORY
4807@cindex memory regions
4808@cindex regions of memory
4809@cindex allocating memory
4810@cindex discontinuous memory
4811The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
4812memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
4813
4814The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
4815memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
4816may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
4817can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
4818set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
4819regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
4820around to fit into the available regions.
4821
4822A linker script may contain at most one use of the @code{MEMORY}
4823command. However, you can define as many blocks of memory within it as
4824you wish. The syntax is:
4825@smallexample
4826@group
a1ab1d2a 4827MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4828 @{
4829 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
4830 @dots{}
4831 @}
4832@end group
4833@end smallexample
4834
4835The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
4836region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
4837Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4838with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4a93e180
NC
4839must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
4840add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
9d5777a3 4841command.
252b5132
RH
4842
4843@cindex memory region attributes
4844The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
4845whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
4846not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
4847@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
4848section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
4849the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
4850them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
4851
4852The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
4853@table @samp
4854@item R
4855Read-only section
4856@item W
4857Read/write section
4858@item X
4859Executable section
4860@item A
4861Allocatable section
4862@item I
4863Initialized section
4864@item L
4865Same as @samp{I}
4866@item !
c09e9a8c 4867Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
252b5132
RH
4868@end table
4869
4870If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
4871@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
4872attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
4873in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
4874attributes.
4875
4876@kindex ORIGIN =
4877@kindex o =
4878@kindex org =
9cd6d51a
NC
4879The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
4880the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
4881cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
4882abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
4883@code{ORG}).
252b5132
RH
4884
4885@kindex LENGTH =
4886@kindex len =
4887@kindex l =
4888The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
4889region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
9cd6d51a
NC
4890be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
4891@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
252b5132
RH
4892
4893In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
4894available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
4895and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
4896linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
4897is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
4898or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
4899explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
4900region.
4901
4902@smallexample
4903@group
a1ab1d2a 4904MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4905 @{
4906 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
4907 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
4908 @}
4909@end group
4910@end smallexample
4911
4912Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
4913specific output sections into that memory region by using the
4914@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
4915a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
4916output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
4917was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
4918the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
4919output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
4920region, the linker will issue an error message.
4921
3ec57632 4922It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
c0065db7 4923expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
3ec57632
NC
4924@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
4925
4926@smallexample
4927@group
c0065db7 4928 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
3ec57632
NC
4929@end group
4930@end smallexample
4931
252b5132
RH
4932@node PHDRS
4933@section PHDRS Command
4934@kindex PHDRS
4935@cindex program headers
4936@cindex ELF program headers
4937@cindex program segments
4938@cindex segments, ELF
4939The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
4940@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
4941loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
4942program with the @samp{-p} option.
4943
4944When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
4945reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
4946program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
4947This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
4948interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
4949
4950The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
4951in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
4952precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
4953the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
4954not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
4955
4956The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
4957generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
4958ignore @code{PHDRS}.
4959
4960This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
4961@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
4962
4963@smallexample
4964@group
4965PHDRS
4966@{
4967 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
4968 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
4969@}
4970@end group
4971@end smallexample
4972
4973The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
4974of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
4975header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4976with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5c1a3f0f
NS
4977must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
4978is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
252b5132
RH
4979
4980Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
4981system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
4982specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
4983sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
4984attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
4985Section Phdr}.
4986
4987It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
4988merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
4989repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
4990contain the section.
4991
4992If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
4993then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
4994not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
4995convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
4996placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
4997default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
4998segment at all.
4999
5000@kindex FILEHDR
5001@kindex PHDRS
5c1a3f0f 5002You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
252b5132
RH
5003the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5004The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5005file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5c1a3f0f 5006include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
4100cea3
AM
5007segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5008these keywords.
252b5132
RH
5009
5010The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5011value of the keyword.
5012
5013@table @asis
5014@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5015Indicates an unused program header.
5016
5017@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5018Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5019the file.
5020
5021@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5022Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5023
5024@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5025Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5026found.
5027
5028@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5029Indicates a segment holding note information.
5030
5031@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5032A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5033ABI.
5034
5035@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5036Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5037
5038@item @var{expression}
5039An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5040be used for types not defined above.
5041@end table
5042
5043You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5044in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5045@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5046Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5047output section attribute.
5048
5049The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5050which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5051explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5052an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5053header.
5054
5055Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5056headers used on a native ELF system.
5057
5058@example
5059@group
5060PHDRS
5061@{
5062 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5063 interp PT_INTERP ;
5064 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5065 data PT_LOAD ;
5066 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5067@}
5068
5069SECTIONS
5070@{
5071 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5072 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5073 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5074 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5075 @dots{}
5076 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5077 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5078 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5079 @dots{}
5080@}
5081@end group
5082@end example
5083
5084@node VERSION
5085@section VERSION Command
5086@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5087@cindex symbol versions
5088@cindex version script
5089@cindex versions of symbols
5090The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5091only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5092symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5093a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5094shared library.
5095
5096You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5097you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5098also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5099
5100The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5101@smallexample
5102VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5103@end smallexample
5104
5105The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5106Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5107version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5108version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5109version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5110scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5111library.
5112
5113The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5114examples.
5115
5116@smallexample
5117VERS_1.1 @{
5118 global:
5119 foo1;
5120 local:
a1ab1d2a
UD
5121 old*;
5122 original*;
5123 new*;
252b5132
RH
5124@};
5125
5126VERS_1.2 @{
5127 foo2;
5128@} VERS_1.1;
5129
5130VERS_2.0 @{
5131 bar1; bar2;
c0065db7 5132 extern "C++" @{
86043bbb 5133 ns::*;
bb1515f2
MF
5134 "f(int, double)";
5135 @};
252b5132
RH
5136@} VERS_1.2;
5137@end smallexample
5138
5139This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5140version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5141The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5142a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
313e35ee
AM
5143of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5144symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5145is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5146in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
86043bbb
MM
5147However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5148name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
252b5132
RH
5149
5150Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5151depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5152to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5153
5154Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5155depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5156and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5157
5158When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5159specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5160unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
a981ed6f 5161unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
ae5a3597
AM
5162somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5163wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5164wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5165set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5166ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
252b5132
RH
5167
5168The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5169they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5170could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5171However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5172
0f6bf451 5173Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
6b9b879a
JJ
5174in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5175symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5176won't.
5177
5178@smallexample
7c9c73be 5179@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
9d201f2f 5180@end smallexample
6b9b879a 5181
252b5132
RH
5182When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5183symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5184requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5185shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5186loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5187linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5188application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5189way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5190all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5191search for each symbol reference.
5192
5193The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5194doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5195that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5196functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5197the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5198required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5199that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5200versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5201the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5202
5203There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5204first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5205source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5206script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5207maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5208@smallexample
5209__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5210@end smallexample
5211@noindent
5212in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5213be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5214The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
96a94295
L
5215@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5216takes precedence over a version script.
252b5132
RH
5217
5218The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5219function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5220an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5221version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5222linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5223
5224To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5225source file. Here is an example:
5226
5227@smallexample
5228__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5229__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5230__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5231__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5232@end smallexample
5233
5234In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5235unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5236example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5237@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5238
5239When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5240some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5241this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5242@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5243declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5244you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5245
5246If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5247within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
36f63dca 5248(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
252b5132
RH
5249specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5250
cb840a31
L
5251You can also specify the language in the version script:
5252
5253@smallexample
5254VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5255@end smallexample
5256
c0065db7 5257The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
cb840a31
L
5258The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5259demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
bb1515f2
MF
5260patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5261@samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
cb840a31 5262
86043bbb
MM
5263Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5264described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5265or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5266the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5267whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5268cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5269might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5270should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5271expect when you upgrade.
5272
252b5132
RH
5273@node Expressions
5274@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5275@cindex expressions
5276@cindex arithmetic
5277The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5278that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5279expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5280host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5281
5282You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5283
5284The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5285expressions.
5286
5287@menu
5288* Constants:: Constants
0c71d759 5289* Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
252b5132 5290* Symbols:: Symbol Names
ecca9871 5291* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
252b5132
RH
5292* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5293* Operators:: Operators
5294* Evaluation:: Evaluation
5295* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5296* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5297@end menu
5298
5299@node Constants
5300@subsection Constants
5301@cindex integer notation
5302@cindex constants in linker scripts
5303All constants are integers.
5304
5305As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5306octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
8a308ae8 5307hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
11e7fd74 5308@samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
8a308ae8
NC
5309@samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5310value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
252b5132
RH
5311
5312@cindex scaled integers
5313@cindex K and M integer suffixes
5314@cindex M and K integer suffixes
5315@cindex suffixes for integers
5316@cindex integer suffixes
5317In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5318constant by
5319@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5320@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5321@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5322@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5323@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5324@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5325@tex
5326${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5327@end tex
5328@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8a308ae8
NC
5329respectively. For example, the following
5330all refer to the same quantity:
5331
252b5132 5332@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5333_fourk_1 = 4K;
5334_fourk_2 = 4096;
5335_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
8a308ae8 5336_fourk_4 = 10000o;
252b5132
RH
5337@end smallexample
5338
8a308ae8
NC
5339Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5340conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5341
0c71d759
NC
5342@node Symbolic Constants
5343@subsection Symbolic Constants
5344@cindex symbolic constants
5345@kindex CONSTANT
5346It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5347the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5348
5349@table @code
5350@item MAXPAGESIZE
5351@kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5352The target's maximum page size.
5353
5354@item COMMONPAGESIZE
5355@kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5356The target's default page size.
5357@end table
5358
5359So for example:
5360
5361@smallexample
9d5777a3 5362 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
0c71d759
NC
5363@end smallexample
5364
5365will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5366supported by the target.
5367
252b5132
RH
5368@node Symbols
5369@subsection Symbol Names
5370@cindex symbol names
5371@cindex names
5372@cindex quoted symbol names
5373@kindex "
5374Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5375and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5376Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5377specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5378keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5379@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5380"SECTION" = 9;
5381"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
252b5132
RH
5382@end smallexample
5383
5384Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5385to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5386whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5387
ecca9871
L
5388@node Orphan Sections
5389@subsection Orphan Sections
5390@cindex orphan
5391Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5392are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5393script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5394output file, but it has to guess as to where they should be
5395placed. The linker uses a simple heuristic to do this. It
5396attempts to place orphan sections after non-orphan sections of the
5397same attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc.
5398If there is not enough room to do this then it places
5399at the end of the file.
5400
5401For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type as
5402well as section flag.
5403
41911f68 5404If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
a61ca861 5405the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
9aec8434 5406__start_SECNAME and __stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
41911f68
NC
5407section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
5408orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
5409representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
5410character.
5411
252b5132
RH
5412@node Location Counter
5413@subsection The Location Counter
5414@kindex .
5415@cindex dot
5416@cindex location counter
5417@cindex current output location
5418The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5419current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5420location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5421within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5422anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5423
5424@cindex holes
5425Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5426moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
dc0b6aa0
AM
5427location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5428and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5429doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
252b5132
RH
5430
5431@smallexample
5432SECTIONS
5433@{
5434 output :
5435 @{
5436 file1(.text)
5437 . = . + 1000;
5438 file2(.text)
5439 . += 1000;
5440 file3(.text)
563e308f 5441 @} = 0x12345678;
252b5132
RH
5442@}
5443@end smallexample
5444@noindent
5445In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5446located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5447followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5448@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
563e308f 5449@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
252b5132
RH
5450specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5451
5c6bbab8
NC
5452@cindex dot inside sections
5453Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5454current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
69da35b5 5455statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5c6bbab8
NC
5456absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5457however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5458not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5459
5460@smallexample
5461SECTIONS
5462@{
5463 . = 0x100
5464 .text: @{
5465 *(.text)
5466 . = 0x200
5467 @}
5468 . = 0x500
5469 .data: @{
5470 *(.data)
5471 . += 0x600
5472 @}
5473@}
5474@end smallexample
5475
5476The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5477and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5478the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5479much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5480move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5481and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5482the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5483the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5484
b5666f2f
AM
5485@cindex dot outside sections
5486Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5487output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5488needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5489
5490@smallexample
5491SECTIONS
5492@{
5493 start_of_text = . ;
5494 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5495 end_of_text = . ;
5496
5497 start_of_data = . ;
5498 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5499 end_of_data = . ;
5500@}
5501@end smallexample
5502
5503If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5504not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5505between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5506should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5507blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5508the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5509sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5510statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5511special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5512place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5513as follows:
5514
5515@smallexample
5516SECTIONS
5517@{
5518 start_of_text = . ;
5519 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5520 end_of_text = . ;
5521
5522 start_of_data = . ;
5523 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5524 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5525 end_of_data = . ;
5526@}
5527@end smallexample
5528
5529This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5530@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5531placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5532assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5533a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5534section. So you could write:
5535
5536@smallexample
5537SECTIONS
5538@{
5539 start_of_text = . ;
5540 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5541 end_of_text = . ;
5542
5543 . = . ;
5544 start_of_data = . ;
5545 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5546 end_of_data = . ;
5547@}
5548@end smallexample
5549
5550Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
5551@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
5552
252b5132
RH
5553@need 2000
5554@node Operators
5555@subsection Operators
5556@cindex operators for arithmetic
5557@cindex arithmetic operators
5558@cindex precedence in expressions
5559The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
5560the standard bindings and precedence levels:
5561@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5562@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5563@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5564@smallexample
5565precedence associativity Operators Notes
5566(highest)
55671 left ! - ~ (1)
55682 left * / %
55693 left + -
55704 left >> <<
55715 left == != > < <= >=
55726 left &
55737 left |
55748 left &&
55759 left ||
557610 right ? :
557711 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
5578(lowest)
5579@end smallexample
5580Notes:
a1ab1d2a 5581(1) Prefix operators
252b5132
RH
5582(2) @xref{Assignments}.
5583@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5584@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5585@tex
5586\vskip \baselineskip
5587%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
5588\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
5589\hrule
5590\halign
5591{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
5592height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5593&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
5594height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5595\noalign{\hrule}
5596height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5597&highest&&&&&\cr
5598% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
a1ab1d2a 5599&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
252b5132
RH
5600&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
5601&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
5602&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
5603&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
5604&6&&left&&\&&\cr
5605&7&&left&&|&\cr
5606&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
5607&9&&left&&||&\cr
5608&10&&right&&? :&\cr
5609&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
5610&lowest&&&&&\cr
5611height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
5612\hrule}
5613@end tex
5614@iftex
5615{
5616@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
5617@dag@quad Prefix operators.
5618@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
5619}
5620@end iftex
5621@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5622
5623@node Evaluation
5624@subsection Evaluation
5625@cindex lazy evaluation
5626@cindex expression evaluation order
5627The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
5628an expression when absolutely necessary.
5629
5630The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
5631address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
5632regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
5633as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
5634
5635However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
5636until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
5637other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
5638for use in the symbol assignment expression.
5639
5640The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
5641assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
5642allocation.
5643
5644Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
5645@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
5646
5647If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
5648available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
5649following
5650@smallexample
5651@group
5652SECTIONS
5653 @{
a1ab1d2a 5654 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
252b5132
RH
5655 @{ *(.text) @}
5656 @}
5657@end group
5658@end smallexample
5659@noindent
5660will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
5661address}.
5662
5663@node Expression Section
5664@subsection The Section of an Expression
5665@cindex expression sections
5666@cindex absolute expressions
5667@cindex relative expressions
5668@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
5669@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
5670@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
7542af2a
AM
5671Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
5672relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
5673using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
5674value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
5675symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
5676operations.
5677
abf4be64
AM
5678Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
5679section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
5680address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
5681@code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
5682functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
01554a74
AM
5683One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
5684(@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
5c3049d2
AM
5685differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
5686versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
5687section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
5688Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
01554a74
AM
5689absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
5690given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
5691everywhere.
5c3049d2
AM
5692
5693In the following simple example,
252b5132 5694
7542af2a
AM
5695@smallexample
5696@group
5697SECTIONS
5698 @{
5699 . = 0x100;
5700 __executable_start = 0x100;
5701 .data :
5702 @{
5703 . = 0x10;
5704 __data_start = 0x10;
5705 *(.data)
5706 @}
5707 @dots{}
5708 @}
5709@end group
5710@end smallexample
252b5132 5711
7542af2a
AM
5712both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
5713address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
5714@code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
5715section in the second two assignments.
252b5132 5716
5c3049d2
AM
5717For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
5718addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
7542af2a
AM
5719
5720@itemize @bullet
5721@item
c05f749e
AM
5722Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
5723operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
5724absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
5725@item
7542af2a
AM
5726Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
5727relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
5728and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
5729@item
c05f749e
AM
5730Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
5731in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
5732address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
5733before applying the operator.
7542af2a
AM
5734@end itemize
5735
5736The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
5737
5738@itemize @bullet
5739@item
5740An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
5741@item
5742The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
5743@item
9bc8bb33 5744The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
11e7fd74 5745relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
9bc8bb33
AM
5746(after above conversions) is also a number.
5747@item
5748The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
5749relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
5750section as the relative operand(s).
7542af2a
AM
5751@item
5752The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
5753conversions) is an absolute address.
5754@end itemize
252b5132
RH
5755
5756You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
5757to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
5758create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
5759section @samp{.data}:
5760@smallexample
5761SECTIONS
5762 @{
5763 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
5764 @}
5765@end smallexample
5766@noindent
5767If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
5768@samp{.data} section.
5769
7542af2a
AM
5770Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
5771particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
5772
252b5132
RH
5773@node Builtin Functions
5774@subsection Builtin Functions
5775@cindex functions in expressions
5776The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
5777use in linker script expressions.
5778
5779@table @code
5780@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5781@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5782@cindex expression, absolute
5783Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
5784of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
5785value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
5786normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
5787
5788@item ADDR(@var{section})
5789@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
5790@cindex section address in expression
7542af2a 5791Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
252b5132 5792script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
7542af2a
AM
5793the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
5794@code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
5795@code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
5796the other two will be absolute:
252b5132
RH
5797@smallexample
5798@group
5799SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5800 .output1 :
a1ab1d2a 5801 @{
252b5132
RH
5802 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
5803 @dots{}
5804 @}
5805 .output :
5806 @{
5807 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
5808 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
5809 @}
5810@dots{} @}
5811@end group
5812@end smallexample
5813
876f4090
NS
5814@item ALIGN(@var{align})
5815@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
5816@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
5817@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
252b5132
RH
5818@cindex round up location counter
5819@cindex align location counter
876f4090
NS
5820@cindex round up expression
5821@cindex align expression
5822Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
5823to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
5824doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
5825arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
5826expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
5827equivalent to @code{ALIGN(., @var{align})}).
5828
5829Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
5830next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
5831variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
5832input sections:
252b5132
RH
5833@smallexample
5834@group
5835SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5836 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
5837 *(.data)
5838 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
5839 @}
5840@dots{} @}
5841@end group
5842@end smallexample
5843@noindent
5844The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
5845a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
5846a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
5847of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
5848
5849The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
5850
362c1d1a
NS
5851@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5852@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5853@cindex section alignment
5854Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5855been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5856evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5857the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
5858value in that section.
5859@smallexample
5860@group
5861SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5862 .output @{
5863 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
5864 @dots{}
5865 @}
5866@dots{} @}
5867@end group
5868@end smallexample
5869
252b5132
RH
5870@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
5871@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
5872This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
5873scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
5874section.
5875
2d20f7bf
JJ
5876@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5877@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5878This is equivalent to either
5879@smallexample
5880(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
5881@end smallexample
5882or
5883@smallexample
5884(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
5885@end smallexample
5886@noindent
5887depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
5888for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
5889@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
5890If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
5891memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
5892bytes in the on-disk file.
5893
5894This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
5895any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
5896@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
5897be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
5898working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
5899
5900@noindent
5901Example:
5902@smallexample
5903 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
5904@end smallexample
5905
5906@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5907@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5908This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
5909evaluation purposes.
5910
5911@smallexample
5912 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
5913@end smallexample
5914
a4f5ad88
JJ
5915@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5916@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5917This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
5918@samp{-z relro} option is used. Second argument is returned.
5919When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
5920does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
5921@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
5922boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
5923it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
5924@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}.
5925
5926@smallexample
5927 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
5928@end smallexample
5929
252b5132
RH
5930@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5931@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5932@cindex symbol defaults
5933Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
420e579c
HPN
5934defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
5935return 0. You can use this function to provide
252b5132
RH
5936default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
5937shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
5938the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
5939existed, its value is preserved:
5940
5941@smallexample
5942@group
5943SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5944 .text : @{
5945 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
5946 @dots{}
5947 @}
5948 @dots{}
5949@}
5950@end group
5951@end smallexample
5952
3ec57632
NC
5953@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
5954@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
5955Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5956
252b5132
RH
5957@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
5958@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
5959@cindex section load address in expression
7542af2a 5960Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
252b5132
RH
5961Section LMA}).
5962
2e53f7d6
NC
5963@item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
5964@kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
5965Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
5966@code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
5967
252b5132
RH
5968@kindex MAX
5969@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5970Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5971
5972@kindex MIN
5973@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5974Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5975
5976@item NEXT(@var{exp})
5977@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
5978@cindex unallocated address, next
5979Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
5980This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
5981use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
5982output file, the two functions are equivalent.
5983
3ec57632
NC
5984@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5985@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5986Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5987
ba916c8a
MM
5988@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5989@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5990Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
c5da8c7d
NC
5991value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
5992@samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
5993will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
5994can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
7542af2a 5995``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
ba916c8a
MM
5996name.
5997
252b5132
RH
5998@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
5999@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6000@cindex section size
6001Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6002been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6003evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6004@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6005@smallexample
6006@group
6007SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6008 .output @{
6009 .start = . ;
6010 @dots{}
6011 .end = . ;
6012 @}
6013 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6014 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6015@dots{} @}
6016@end group
6017@end smallexample
6018
6019@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6020@itemx sizeof_headers
6021@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6022@cindex header size
6023Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6024information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6025this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6026choose, to facilitate paging.
6027
6028@cindex not enough room for program headers
6029@cindex program headers, not enough room
6030When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6031@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6032number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6033addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6034additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6035room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6036the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6037script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6038you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6039command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6040@end table
6041
6042@node Implicit Linker Scripts
6043@section Implicit Linker Scripts
6044@cindex implicit linker scripts
6045If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6046an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6047linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6048linker will report an error.
6049
6050An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6051
6052Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6053assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6054commands.
6055
6056Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6057at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6058read. This can affect archive searching.
6059
6060@ifset GENERIC
6061@node Machine Dependent
6062@chapter Machine Dependent Features
6063
6064@cindex machine dependencies
ff5dcc92
SC
6065@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6066sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
252b5132
RH
6067functionality are not listed.
6068
6069@menu
36f63dca
NC
6070@ifset H8300
6071* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6072@end ifset
6073@ifset I960
6074* i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
6075@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
6076@ifset M68HC11
6077* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6078@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
6079@ifset ARM
6080* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6081@end ifset
6082@ifset HPPA
6083* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6084@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
6085@ifset M68K
6086* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6087@end ifset
833794fc
MR
6088@ifset MIPS
6089* MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6090@end ifset
3c3bdf30 6091@ifset MMIX
36f63dca 6092* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
3c3bdf30 6093@end ifset
2469cfa2 6094@ifset MSP430
36f63dca 6095* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
2469cfa2 6096@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
6097@ifset POWERPC
6098* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6099@end ifset
6100@ifset POWERPC64
6101* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6102@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
6103@ifset SPU
6104* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6105@end ifset
74459f0e 6106@ifset TICOFF
ff5dcc92 6107* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
74459f0e 6108@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
6109@ifset WIN32
6110* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6111@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
6112@ifset XTENSA
6113* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6114@end ifset
252b5132
RH
6115@end menu
6116@end ifset
6117
252b5132
RH
6118@ifset H8300
6119@ifclear GENERIC
6120@raisesections
6121@end ifclear
6122
6123@node H8/300
ff5dcc92 6124@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
252b5132
RH
6125
6126@cindex H8/300 support
ff5dcc92 6127For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
252b5132
RH
6128you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6129
6130@table @emph
6131@cindex relaxing on H8/300
6132@item relaxing address modes
ff5dcc92 6133@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
252b5132
RH
6134targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6135program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6136respectively.
6137
6138@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6139@item synthesizing instructions
81f5558e 6140@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
ff5dcc92 6141@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
252b5132
RH
6142sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6143page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6144(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6145@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6146top page of memory).
1502569c 6147
81f5558e
NC
6148@command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6149indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6150displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6151the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6152@code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6153whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6154range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6155
1502569c 6156@item bit manipulation instructions
c0065db7 6157@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
1502569c 6158biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
c0065db7 6159which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
1502569c
NC
6160page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6161(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
c0065db7 6162@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c
NC
6163the top page of memory).
6164
6165@item system control instructions
c0065db7
RM
6166@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
616732 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
1502569c
NC
6168changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6169(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
c0065db7 6170@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c 6171the top page of memory).
252b5132
RH
6172@end table
6173
6174@ifclear GENERIC
6175@lowersections
6176@end ifclear
6177@end ifset
6178
36f63dca 6179@ifclear GENERIC
c2dcd04e 6180@ifset Renesas
36f63dca 6181@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
c2dcd04e
NC
6182@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6183@node Renesas
6184@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
36f63dca 6185
c2dcd04e
NC
6186@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6187H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6188options are required for these chips.
36f63dca
NC
6189@end ifset
6190@end ifclear
6191
6192@ifset I960
6193@ifclear GENERIC
6194@raisesections
6195@end ifclear
6196
6197@node i960
6198@section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
6199
6200@cindex i960 support
6201
6202You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
6203specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
6204family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
6205incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
6206linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
6207libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
6208search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
6209
6210For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
6211well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
6212paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
6213the names
6214
6215@smallexample
6216@group
6217try
6218libtry.a
6219tryca
6220libtryca.a
6221@end group
6222@end smallexample
6223
6224@noindent
6225The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
6226two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
6227
6228You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
6229the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
6230use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
6231specifies a library.
6232
6233@cindex @option{--relax} on i960
6234@cindex relaxing on i960
6235@command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
6236you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
6237@code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
6238them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
6239instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
6240instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
6241target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
6242not itself call any subroutines).
6243
48229727
JB
6244@cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
6245@kindex --fix-cortex-a8
6246@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
6247The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
6248
6249The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
6250
85fdf906
AH
6251@kindex --merge-exidx-entries
6252@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
6253The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
6254
36f63dca
NC
6255@ifclear GENERIC
6256@lowersections
6257@end ifclear
6258@end ifset
6259
6260@ifset ARM
6261@ifclear GENERIC
6262@raisesections
6263@end ifclear
6264
93fd0973
SC
6265@ifset M68HC11
6266@ifclear GENERIC
6267@raisesections
6268@end ifclear
6269
6270@node M68HC11/68HC12
6271@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6272
6273@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6274
6275@subsection Linker Relaxation
6276
6277For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6278optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6279
6280@table @emph
6281@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6282@item relaxing address modes
6283@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6284targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6285program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6286respectively.
6287
6288@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6289transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6290page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6291
6292@item relaxing gcc instruction group
6293When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6294of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6295addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6296@code{bset} instructions.
6297
6298@end table
6299
6300@subsection Trampoline Generation
6301
6302@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6303@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6304For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6305call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
c0065db7 6306will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
93fd0973
SC
6307trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6308case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6309point to the function trampoline.
6310
6311@ifclear GENERIC
6312@lowersections
6313@end ifclear
6314@end ifset
6315
36f63dca 6316@node ARM
3674e28a 6317@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
36f63dca
NC
6318
6319@cindex ARM interworking support
6320@kindex --support-old-code
6321For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
b45619c0 6322between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
36f63dca
NC
6323been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6324line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6325libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6326option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
6327given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6328which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6329the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6330non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6331
6332@cindex thumb entry point
6333@cindex entry point, thumb
6334@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6335The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6336@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6337But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6338branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6339executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6340
ce11ba6c
KT
6341@cindex PE import table prefixing
6342@kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6343The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6344the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
11e7fd74 6345element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
ce11ba6c
KT
6346import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6347
e489d0ae
PB
6348@cindex BE8
6349@kindex --be8
6350The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
6351executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian objects.
6352The resulting image will contain big-endian data and little-endian code.
6353
3674e28a
PB
6354@cindex TARGET1
6355@kindex --target1-rel
6356@kindex --target1-abs
6357The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6358@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6359or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6360and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6361
6362@cindex TARGET2
6363@kindex --target2=@var{type}
6364The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6365@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6366meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6367@table @samp
6368@item rel
eeac373a
PB
6369@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6370@item abs
6371@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
3674e28a
PB
6372@item got-rel
6373@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6374@end table
6375
319850b4
JB
6376@cindex FIX_V4BX
6377@kindex --fix-v4bx
6378The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6379specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6380interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6381also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6382
6383In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6384linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6385@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6386
6387In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6388relocations are ignored.
6389
845b51d6
PB
6390@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6391@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6392Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6393relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6394
6395@smallexample
6396TST rM, #1
6397MOVEQ PC, rM
6398BX Rn
6399@end smallexample
6400
6401This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6402and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
11e7fd74 6403condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
845b51d6 6404
33bfe774
JB
6405@cindex USE_BLX
6406@kindex --use-blx
6407The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6408BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6409situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6410code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6411each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6412
6413This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6414specify it if you are using that target.
6415
c6dd86c6
JB
6416@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6417@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6418The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6419bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6420instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6421to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6422the support code can read the intended values.
6423
6424The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6425intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6426and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6427intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6428full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6429you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6430
6431If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6432enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6433@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6434mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6435vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6436@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6437
6438If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6439potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6440such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6441first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6442instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6443the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6444are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6445
2de70689
MGD
6446@cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6447@kindex --fix-arm1176
6448@kindex --no-fix-arm1176
9d5777a3
RM
6449The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6450in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6451are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
2de70689
MGD
6452unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6453
9d5777a3 6454Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
11e7fd74 6455Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
2de70689
MGD
6456http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6457
bf21ed78
MS
6458@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6459@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
726150b7 6460The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
bf21ed78
MS
6461warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6462enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6463linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6464using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6465not be diagnosed.
a9dc9481
JM
6466
6467@cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6468@kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6469The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6470warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6471@code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6472linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6473using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
bf21ed78 6474
726150b7
NC
6475@cindex PIC_VENEER
6476@kindex --pic-veneer
6477The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6478ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6479is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6480@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6481
6482@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6483@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6484The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6485code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6486perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6487placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6488controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6489The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
11e7fd74 6490duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
726150b7
NC
6491group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6492code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6493where they should be placed.
6494
6495The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6496@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
07d72278 6497placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
726150b7
NC
6498branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6499placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6500value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6501exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6502A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6503linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6504from the input sections.
6505
6506The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6507@samp{N = +1}.
6508
1a51c1a4
NC
6509Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6510only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6511otherwise.
6512
36f63dca
NC
6513@ifclear GENERIC
6514@lowersections
6515@end ifclear
6516@end ifset
6517
6518@ifset HPPA
6519@ifclear GENERIC
6520@raisesections
6521@end ifclear
6522
6523@node HPPA ELF32
6524@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
6525@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
6526@kindex --multi-subspace
6527When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
6528import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
6529The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
6530stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
6531multiple sub-spaces.
6532
6533@cindex HPPA stub grouping
6534@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6535Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
6536stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6537@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6538sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6539a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6540the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6541conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6542prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6543A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6544branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6545@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6546@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6547detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6548positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6549
6550Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6551single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6552create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6553large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6554
6555@ifclear GENERIC
6556@lowersections
6557@end ifclear
6558@end ifset
6559
7fb9f789
NC
6560@ifset M68K
6561@ifclear GENERIC
6562@raisesections
6563@end ifclear
6564
6565@node M68K
6566@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6567
6568@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
6569@kindex --got=@var{type}
6570The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
6571The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
6572@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
6573the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
6574@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
6575entries only at non-negative offsets.
6576@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
6577entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
6578support such GOTs.
6579@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
6580output file. All GOT references from a single input object
6581file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
6582files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
6583
6584@ifclear GENERIC
6585@lowersections
6586@end ifclear
6587@end ifset
6588
833794fc
MR
6589@ifset MIPS
6590@ifclear GENERIC
6591@raisesections
6592@end ifclear
6593
6594@node MIPS
6595@section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6596
6597@cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
6598@kindex --insn32
6599@kindex --no-insn32
6600The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
6601microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
6602in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
6603used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
6604or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
6605including 16-bit ones where possible.
6606
6607@ifclear GENERIC
6608@lowersections
6609@end ifclear
6610@end ifset
6611
36f63dca
NC
6612@ifset MMIX
6613@ifclear GENERIC
6614@raisesections
6615@end ifclear
6616
6617@node MMIX
6618@section @code{ld} and MMIX
6619For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
6620@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
6621understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
6622can translate between the two formats.
6623
6624There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
6625Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
6626registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
6627equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
6628@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
6629global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
6630this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
6631symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
6632
7a2de473
HPN
6633Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
6634@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
6635The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
6636of a section.
36f63dca
NC
6637
6638Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
6639are left out from an mmo file.
6640
6641@ifclear GENERIC
6642@lowersections
6643@end ifclear
6644@end ifset
6645
6646@ifset MSP430
6647@ifclear GENERIC
6648@raisesections
6649@end ifclear
6650
6651@node MSP430
6652@section @code{ld} and MSP430
6653For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
6654will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
6655just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
6656
6657@cindex MSP430 extra sections
6658The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
6659
6660@table @code
6661@item @samp{.vectors}
6662Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
6663
6664@item @samp{.bootloader}
6665Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
6666in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6667
6668@item @samp{.infomem}
6669Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
6670this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6671
c0065db7 6672@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
36f63dca
NC
6673This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
6674in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
6675
6676@item @samp{.noinit}
6677Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
6678
c0065db7 6679The last two sections are used by gcc.
36f63dca
NC
6680@end table
6681
6682@ifclear GENERIC
6683@lowersections
6684@end ifclear
6685@end ifset
6686
2a60a7a8
AM
6687@ifset POWERPC
6688@ifclear GENERIC
6689@raisesections
6690@end ifclear
6691
6692@node PowerPC ELF32
6693@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6694@cindex PowerPC long branches
6695@kindex --relax on PowerPC
6696Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
6697displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
6698@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
6699@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
6700the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
6701section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
c8a1f254
NS
6702section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
6703@samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
6704both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
6705considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
2a60a7a8
AM
6706
6707@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
6708@table @option
6709@cindex PowerPC PLT
6710@kindex --bss-plt
6711@item --bss-plt
6712Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
6713generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
6714the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
6715writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
6716@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
6717PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
6718compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
6719BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
6720
016687f8
AM
6721@kindex --secure-plt
6722@item --secure-plt
6723@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
6724@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
6725when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
6726layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
6727style BSS PLT.
6728
2a60a7a8
AM
6729@cindex PowerPC GOT
6730@kindex --sdata-got
6731@item --sdata-got
6732The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
6733sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
6734@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
6735section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
6736@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
6737@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
6738@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
6739@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
6740PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
6741pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
6742GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
6743really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
6744
6745@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
6746@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6747@item --emit-stub-syms
6748This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6749symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6750
6751@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
6752@kindex --no-tls-optimize
6753@item --no-tls-optimize
6754PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6755sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6756disable the optimization.
6757@end table
6758
6759@ifclear GENERIC
6760@lowersections
6761@end ifclear
6762@end ifset
6763
6764@ifset POWERPC64
6765@ifclear GENERIC
6766@raisesections
6767@end ifclear
6768
6769@node PowerPC64 ELF64
6770@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6771
6772@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
6773@table @option
6774@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
6775@kindex --stub-group-size
6776@item --stub-group-size
6777Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
6778by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6779@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6780sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6781a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6782the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6783conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6784prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6785A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6786branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6787@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6788@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6789detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6790positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6791
6792Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6793single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6794create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6795large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6796
6797@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
6798@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6799@item --emit-stub-syms
6800This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6801symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6802
6803@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
6804@kindex --dotsyms
6805@kindex --no-dotsyms
6806@item --dotsyms, --no-dotsyms
6807These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
6808in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
6809function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
6810code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
6811properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
6812to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
6813@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
6814dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
6815feature.
6816
6817@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
6818@kindex --no-tls-optimize
6819@item --no-tls-optimize
6820PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6821sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6822disable the optimization.
6823
6824@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
6825@kindex --no-opd-optimize
6826@item --no-opd-optimize
6827PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
6828corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
e7fc76dd 6829the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
2a60a7a8
AM
6830Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
6831
6832@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
6833@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
6834@item --non-overlapping-opd
6835Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
6836@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
6837the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
6838entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
6839
6840@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
6841@kindex --no-toc-optimize
6842@item --no-toc-optimize
6843PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
6844entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
6845reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
6846marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
6847marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
6848relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
6849unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
6850reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
6851discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
6852reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
6853code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
6854optimization.
6855
6856@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
6857@kindex --no-multi-toc
6858@item --no-multi-toc
794e51c0
AM
6859If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
6860@code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
6861where TOC
2a60a7a8
AM
6862entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
6863total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
6864grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
6865TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
6866calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
6867help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
686864K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
6869Use this option to turn off this feature.
794e51c0
AM
6870
6871@cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
6872@kindex --no-toc-sort
6873@item --no-toc-sort
6874By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
6875happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
6876placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
6877with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
6878referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
6879@code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
6880results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
6881off this feature.
6882
6883@cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
6884@kindex --plt-align
6885@kindex --no-plt-align
6886@item --plt-align
6887@itemx --no-plt-align
6888Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
6889aligned to a 32-byte boundary, or to the specified power of two
6890boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. By default PLT call stubs
6891are packed tightly.
6892
6893@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
6894@kindex --plt-static-chain
6895@kindex --no-plt-static-chain
6896@item --plt-static-chain
6897@itemx --no-plt-static-chain
6898Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
6899chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
6900chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
6901
6902@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
6903@kindex --plt-thread-safe
6904@kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
6905@item --plt-thread-safe
6906@itemx --no-thread-safe
6907With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
6908lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
6909another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
6910order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
6911memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
6912barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
6913looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
6914seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
6915default behaviour.
2a60a7a8
AM
6916@end table
6917
6918@ifclear GENERIC
6919@lowersections
6920@end ifclear
6921@end ifset
6922
49fa1e15
AM
6923@ifset SPU
6924@ifclear GENERIC
6925@raisesections
6926@end ifclear
6927
6928@node SPU ELF
6929@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6930
6931@cindex SPU ELF options
6932@table @option
6933
6934@cindex SPU plugins
6935@kindex --plugin
6936@item --plugin
6937This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
6938
6939@cindex SPU overlays
6940@kindex --no-overlays
6941@item --no-overlays
6942Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
6943regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
6944@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
6945turns off all this special overlay handling.
6946
6947@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
6948@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6949@item --emit-stub-syms
6950This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
6951symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6952
6953@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
6954@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
6955@item --extra-overlay-stubs
6956This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
6957function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
6958on calls to non-overlay regions.
6959
6960@cindex SPU local store size
6961@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
6962@item --local-store=lo:hi
6963@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
6964the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
6965range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
6966
c0065db7 6967@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
6968@kindex --stack-analysis
6969@item --stack-analysis
6970SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
6971unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
6972under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
6973@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
6974@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
6975determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
6976for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
6977for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
6978for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
6979find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
6980and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
6981under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
6982dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
6983is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
6984and calls will be given.
6985
c0065db7 6986@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
6987@kindex --emit-stack-syms
6988@item --emit-stack-syms
6989This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
6990in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
6991These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
6992functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
6993functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
6994such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
6995The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
c0065db7 6996@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
49fa1e15
AM
6997@end table
6998
6999@ifclear GENERIC
7000@lowersections
7001@end ifclear
7002@end ifset
7003
36f63dca
NC
7004@ifset TICOFF
7005@ifclear GENERIC
7006@raisesections
7007@end ifclear
7008
7009@node TI COFF
7010@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7011@cindex TI COFF versions
7012@kindex --format=@var{version}
7013The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7014TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7015also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7016format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7017header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7018
7019@ifclear GENERIC
7020@lowersections
7021@end ifclear
7022@end ifset
7023
2ca22b03
NC
7024@ifset WIN32
7025@ifclear GENERIC
7026@raisesections
7027@end ifclear
7028
7029@node WIN32
7030@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7031
c0065db7 7032This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
b45619c0 7033See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
dc8465bf 7034command line options mentioned here.
2ca22b03
NC
7035
7036@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7037@cindex import libraries
7038@item import libraries
69da35b5 7039The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
2ca22b03 7040libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
69da35b5
NC
7041regular static archives and are handled as any other static
7042archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
2ca22b03
NC
7043support for creating such libraries provided with the
7044@samp{--out-implib} command line option.
7045
c0065db7
RM
7046@item exporting DLL symbols
7047@cindex exporting DLL symbols
dc8465bf
NC
7048The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
7049
7050@table @emph
7051@item using auto-export functionality
7052@cindex using auto-export functionality
7053By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
7054which is controlled by the following command line options:
7055
0a5d968e
NC
7056@itemize
7057@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
7058@item --exclude-symbols
7059@item --exclude-libs
e1c37eb5 7060@item --exclude-modules-for-implib
09e2aba4 7061@item --version-script
0a5d968e
NC
7062@end itemize
7063
09e2aba4
DK
7064When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
7065(global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
7066symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
7067often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
7068private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
9d5777a3 7069options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
09e2aba4
DK
7070exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
7071final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
7072
7073If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
0a5d968e
NC
7074command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
7075if either of the following are true:
7076
7077@itemize
7078@item A DEF file is used.
7079@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
7080@end itemize
dc8465bf 7081
c0065db7
RM
7082@item using a DEF file
7083@cindex using a DEF file
dc8465bf
NC
7084Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
7085an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
7086exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7087name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
0a5d968e 7088command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
dc8465bf
NC
7089
7090@example
7091gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7092@end example
7093
0a5d968e
NC
7094Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7095@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7096
dc8465bf
NC
7097Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7098
7099@example
4b5bd4e7 7100LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
dc8465bf
NC
7101
7102EXPORTS
7103foo
7104bar
7105_bar = bar
4b5bd4e7
DS
7106another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7107var1 DATA
7fcab871
KT
7108doo = foo == foo2
7109eoo DATA == var1
c0065db7 7110@end example
dc8465bf 7111
7fcab871 7112This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
4b5bd4e7
DS
7113symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7114alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7115by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7116@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7fcab871
KT
7117@code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7118export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7119in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7120symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
4b5bd4e7 7121
6b31ad16
DS
7122The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7123name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7124the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7125
b45619c0
NC
7126When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7127library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6b31ad16 7128@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
c0065db7 7129executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6b31ad16
DS
7130
7131With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7132specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
c0065db7 7133non-default base address for the image.
6b31ad16
DS
7134
7135If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
a2877985
DS
7136or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7137filename specified on the command line.
6b31ad16 7138
4b5bd4e7
DS
7139The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7140
7141@example
7142EXPORTS
7143 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7144 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7fcab871 7145 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
c0065db7 7146@end example
4b5bd4e7
DS
7147
7148Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7149@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7150@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7151@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7152Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7fcab871
KT
7153@samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7154string in import/export table for the symbol.
4b5bd4e7
DS
7155
7156The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7157
7158@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7159will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7160by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7161linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7162library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7163
7164@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7165The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7166the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7167@code{*_imp__foo}).
7168
7169@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7170well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7171read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7172variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7173the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7174extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7175application will behave unexpectedly.
7176
7177@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
7178it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
7179symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
7180API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
7181the DLL without an import library.
c0065db7 7182
4b5bd4e7
DS
7183See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
7184other DEF file statements
dc8465bf
NC
7185
7186@cindex creating a DEF file
7187While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
7188with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
0a5d968e
NC
7189
7190@item Using decorations
7191@cindex Using decorations
7192Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
7193itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
7194declared as:
7195
7196@example
7197__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
7198__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
7199@end example
7200
7201All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
7202any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
7203this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
7204the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7205
7206Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
c0065db7 7207decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
0a5d968e
NC
7208instead:
7209
7210@example
7211__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
7212__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
7213@end example
7214
c0065db7
RM
7215This complicates the structure of library header files, because
7216when included by the library itself the header must declare the
0a5d968e
NC
7217variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
7218code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
c0065db7 7219of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
0a5d968e
NC
7220omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
7221@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
b45619c0 7222information.
c0065db7 7223@end table
dc8465bf 7224
2ca22b03
NC
7225@cindex automatic data imports
7226@item automatic data imports
7227The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
69da35b5 7228by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
2ca22b03 7229compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
c0065db7 7230issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
69da35b5 7231code to these platforms, especially for large
2ca22b03 7232c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
c0065db7 7233initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
b45619c0 7234decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
c0065db7 7235platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
69da35b5
NC
7236command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
7237The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
7238suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
7239trigger the feature's use.
7240
c0065db7 7241auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
69da35b5
NC
7242additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
7243
c0065db7 7244"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
69da35b5
NC
7245documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
7246
c0065db7
RM
7247The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
7248occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
7249One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
69da35b5
NC
7250below.
7251
7252@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
c0065db7
RM
7253For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
7254object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
7255offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
7256field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
7257in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
69da35b5 7258without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
c0065db7 7259The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
69da35b5
NC
7260references.
7261
c0065db7
RM
7262The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
7263be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
7264themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
7265runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
7266compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
7267support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
69da35b5
NC
7268run without error on an older system.
7269
c0065db7
RM
7270@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
7271enabled as needed.
2ca22b03
NC
7272
7273@cindex direct linking to a dll
7274@item direct linking to a dll
7275The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
7276including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
69da35b5 7277libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
b45619c0 7278traditional import library method, especially when linking large
c0065db7
RM
7279libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
7280function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
7281though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
69da35b5 7282storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
c0065db7 7283tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
69da35b5
NC
7284large or complex libraries when using import libs.
7285
c0065db7 7286Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
69da35b5 7287@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
c0065db7 7288of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
69da35b5
NC
7289perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
7290select the dll instead of an import library.
7291
2ca22b03 7292
69da35b5
NC
7293For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
7294to find, in the first directory of its search path,
2ca22b03
NC
7295
7296@example
45e948fe
NC
7297libxxx.dll.a
7298xxx.dll.a
7299libxxx.a
7300xxx.lib
69da35b5 7301cygxxx.dll (*)
45e948fe
NC
7302libxxx.dll
7303xxx.dll
2ca22b03
NC
7304@end example
7305
69da35b5
NC
7306before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
7307
c0065db7
RM
7308(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
7309where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
7310@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
7311file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
69da35b5
NC
7312@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
7313
c0065db7
RM
7314Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
7315@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
69da35b5
NC
7316was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
7317various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
7318could coexist on the same machine.
7319
2ca22b03
NC
7320The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
7321applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
69da35b5 7322libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
2ca22b03
NC
7323
7324@example
7325bin/
7326 cygxxx.dll
7327lib/
7328 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
c0065db7 7329 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
2ca22b03
NC
7330@end example
7331
c0065db7
RM
7332Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
7333done two ways:
2ca22b03
NC
7334
73351. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
7336@example
7337gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7338@end example
2ca22b03 7339
69da35b5
NC
7340However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
7341(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
7342@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
7343not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
7344
2ca22b03
NC
73452. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
7346directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
7347should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
7348making the app/dll.
7349
7350@example
7351ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
c0065db7 7352@end example
2ca22b03
NC
7353
7354Then you can link without any make environment changes.
7355
7356@example
7357gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7358@end example
69da35b5
NC
7359
7360This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
7361perfectly legal
7362
7363@example
7364bin/
7365 cygxxx-5.dll
7366lib/
c0065db7 7367 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
69da35b5
NC
7368@end example
7369
dc8465bf 7370Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
69da35b5
NC
7371even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
7372@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
7373
7374Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
45e948fe 7375wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
69da35b5
NC
7376
73771. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
7378work with auto-imported data.
7379
dc8465bf
NC
73802. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
7381import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
7382symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
7383for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
7384possible to do this without an import lib.
69da35b5 7385
45e948fe
NC
73863. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
7387critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
7388in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
7389stdcall-decorated assembly names.
7390
69da35b5 7391So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
c0065db7
RM
7392true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
7393a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
7394binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
69da35b5
NC
7395massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
7396requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
7397will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
dc8465bf 7398
c0065db7 7399@item symbol aliasing
dc8465bf 7400@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7401@item adding additional names
7402Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
dc8465bf
NC
7403A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
7404exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
7405when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
c0065db7 7406import library. Consider the following DEF file:
dc8465bf 7407
c0065db7 7408@example
dc8465bf
NC
7409LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7410
7411EXPORTS
c0065db7 7412foo
dc8465bf 7413_foo = foo
c0065db7 7414@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7415
7416The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
7417
7418Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
7419source code using the "weak" attribute:
7420
c0065db7
RM
7421@example
7422void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
dc8465bf 7423void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
c0065db7 7424@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7425
7426See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
7427symbols.
7428
7429@item renaming symbols
7430Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
c0065db7 7431kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
dc8465bf
NC
7432@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
7433DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
c0065db7 7434created). In the following example:
dc8465bf 7435
c0065db7 7436@example
dc8465bf
NC
7437LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7438
7439EXPORTS
7440_foo = foo
c0065db7 7441@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7442
7443The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
7444@samp{_foo}.
c0065db7 7445@end table
dc8465bf 7446
0a5d968e 7447Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
c0065db7 7448unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
0a5d968e 7449If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
c0065db7
RM
7450@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
7451that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
7452@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
7453renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
7454to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
7455the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
7456In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
0a5d968e 7457which is probably not what you wanted.
c87db184
CF
7458
7459@cindex weak externals
7460@item weak externals
7461The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
7462weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
7463defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
7464are three variants of weak externals:
7465@itemize
7466@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
7467called lazy externals.
7468@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
7469This form is not presently implemented.
7470@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
7471implemented.
7472@end itemize
7473As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
7474are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
7475uses a default value.
c1711530
DK
7476
7477@cindex aligned common symbols
7478@item aligned common symbols
7479As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
7480desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
7481the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
7482carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
7483by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
7484tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
7485but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
7486warnings about unknown linker directives.
2ca22b03
NC
7487@end table
7488
7489@ifclear GENERIC
7490@lowersections
7491@end ifclear
7492@end ifset
7493
e0001a05
NC
7494@ifset XTENSA
7495@ifclear GENERIC
7496@raisesections
7497@end ifclear
7498
7499@node Xtensa
7500@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
7501
7502@cindex Xtensa processors
7503The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
7504@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
7505specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
7506keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
7507example, with the command:
7508
7509@smallexample
7510SECTIONS
7511@{
7512 .text : @{
7513 *(.literal .text)
7514 @}
7515@}
7516@end smallexample
7517
7518@noindent
7519@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
7520and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
7521literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
7522interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
7523group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
7524files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
7525and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
e0001a05 7526
43cd72b9 7527@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
e0001a05 7528@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
43cd72b9
BW
7529Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
7530provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
7531is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
7532literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
7533will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
7534location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
7535the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
7536unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
7537@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
7538range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
7539
7540For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
7541to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
7542instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
7543instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
7544instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
7545@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
7546hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
7547By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
7548switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
7549density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
7550instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
7551performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
7552linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
7553a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
7554
7555The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
7556control the linker:
7557
7558@cindex Xtensa options
7559@table @option
43cd72b9
BW
7560@item --size-opt
7561When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
7562more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
7563no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
7564alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
7565preserve the correctness of the code.
7566@end table
e0001a05
NC
7567
7568@ifclear GENERIC
7569@lowersections
7570@end ifclear
7571@end ifset
7572
252b5132
RH
7573@ifclear SingleFormat
7574@node BFD
7575@chapter BFD
7576
7577@cindex back end
7578@cindex object file management
7579@cindex object formats available
7580@kindex objdump -i
7581The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
7582These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
7583object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
7584format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
7585it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
7586associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
7587object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
7588(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
7589list all the formats available for your configuration.
7590
7591@cindex BFD requirements
7592@cindex requirements for BFD
7593As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
7594several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
7595BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
7596formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
7597been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
7598BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
7599may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
7600
7601One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
7602mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
7603useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
7604conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
7605
7606@menu
7607* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
7608@end menu
7609
7610@node BFD outline
36f63dca 7611@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
252b5132
RH
7612@cindex opening object files
7613@include bfdsumm.texi
7614@end ifclear
7615
7616@node Reporting Bugs
7617@chapter Reporting Bugs
ff5dcc92
SC
7618@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
7619@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
252b5132 7620
ff5dcc92 7621Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
252b5132
RH
7622
7623Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
7624it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
ff5dcc92 7625to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
252b5132 7626work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
ff5dcc92 7627@command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
7628
7629In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7630information that enables us to fix the bug.
7631
7632@menu
7633* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7634* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7635@end menu
7636
7637@node Bug Criteria
36f63dca 7638@section Have You Found a Bug?
252b5132
RH
7639@cindex bug criteria
7640
7641If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7642
7643@itemize @bullet
7644@cindex fatal signal
7645@cindex linker crash
7646@cindex crash of linker
7647@item
7648If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
ff5dcc92 7649@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
252b5132
RH
7650
7651@cindex error on valid input
7652@item
ff5dcc92 7653If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
252b5132
RH
7654
7655@cindex invalid input
7656@item
ff5dcc92 7657If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
252b5132
RH
7658may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
7659object files are correct.
7660
7661@item
7662If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
ff5dcc92 7663improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
252b5132
RH
7664@end itemize
7665
7666@node Bug Reporting
36f63dca 7667@section How to Report Bugs
252b5132 7668@cindex bug reports
ff5dcc92 7669@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
252b5132
RH
7670
7671A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
ff5dcc92 7672products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
252b5132
RH
7673recommend you contact that organization first.
7674
7675You can find contact information for many support companies and
7676individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
7677distribution.
7678
ad22bfe8 7679@ifset BUGURL
ff5dcc92 7680Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
ad22bfe8
JM
7681@value{BUGURL}.
7682@end ifset
252b5132
RH
7683
7684The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7685@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
7686fact or leave it out, state it!
7687
7688Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
7689problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
b553b183
NC
7690assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
7691matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
7692the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
7693location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
7694were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
7695into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
7696specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
c0065db7 7697and the most helpful.
b553b183
NC
7698
7699Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
7700the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
7701on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
252b5132
RH
7702
7703Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
36f63dca
NC
7704bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
7705respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
7706You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
252b5132
RH
7707
7708To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
7709
7710@itemize @bullet
7711@item
ff5dcc92 7712The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
252b5132
RH
7713the @samp{--version} argument.
7714
7715Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
ff5dcc92 7716the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
7717
7718@item
ff5dcc92 7719Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
252b5132
RH
7720patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
7721
7722@item
7723The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
7724version number.
7725
7726@item
ff5dcc92 7727What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
252b5132
RH
7728``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
7729
7730@item
7731The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
7732observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
7733list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
7734sufficient.
7735
7736If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
7737and then we might not encounter the bug.
7738
7739@item
7740A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
b553b183
NC
7741bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
7742provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
7743bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
7744state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
7745requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
7746we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
7747attachments are best.
252b5132
RH
7748
7749If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
7750@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
7751object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
7752@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
7753how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
7754
7755@item
7756A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
7757incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
7758
ff5dcc92 7759Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
252b5132
RH
7760will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
7761not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
7762a chance to make a mistake.
7763
7764Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
7765say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
b45619c0 7766copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
252b5132
RH
7767C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
7768and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
7769fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
7770you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
7771any conclusion from our observations.
7772
7773@item
ff5dcc92 7774If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
252b5132
RH
7775diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
7776@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
ff5dcc92 7777If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
252b5132
RH
7778context, not by line number.
7779
7780The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
7781sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
7782@end itemize
7783
7784Here are some things that are not necessary:
7785
7786@itemize @bullet
7787@item
7788A description of the envelope of the bug.
7789
7790Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
7791which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
7792changes will not affect it.
7793
7794This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
7795will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
7796with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
7797We recommend that you save your time for something else.
7798
7799Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
7800of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
7801output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
7802less time, and so on.
7803
7804However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
7805report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
7806
7807@item
7808A patch for the bug.
7809
7810A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
7811the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
7812a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
7813to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
7814
ff5dcc92 7815Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
252b5132
RH
7816construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
7817through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
7818able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
7819fixed.
7820
7821And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
7822patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
7823help us to understand.
7824
7825@item
7826A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
7827
7828Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
7829things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
7830@end itemize
7831
7832@node MRI
7833@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
7834@cindex MRI compatibility
ff5dcc92
SC
7835To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
7836linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
252b5132
RH
7837alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
7838described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
7839simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
ff5dcc92 7840@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
252b5132
RH
7841linker commands; these commands are described here.
7842
7843In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
7844file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
7845features to make use of them.
7846
7847You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
7848@samp{-c} command-line option.
7849
7850Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
7851command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
7852blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
ff5dcc92 7853MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
7854issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
7855
7856Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
7857
7858You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
7859lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
7860The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
7861
7862@table @code
7863@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
7864@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
7865@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 7866Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
252b5132
RH
7867the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
7868@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
7869your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
7870script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
7871commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
7872input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
7873@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
7874
7875@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
7876@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
7877Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
7878in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
7879
7880@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
7881
7882@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
7883@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
7884Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
7885@var{expression} should be a power of two.
7886
7887@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
7888@item BASE @var{expression}
7889Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
7890absolute addresses) in the output file.
7891
7892@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
7893@item CHIP @var{expression}
7894@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
7895This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
7896
7897@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
7898@item END
7899This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
7900
7901@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
7902@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
7903Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
a1ab1d2a 7904language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
252b5132
RH
7905
7906@enumerate
a1ab1d2a 7907@item
252b5132
RH
7908S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
7909
7910@item
7911IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
7912
7913@item
7914COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
7915@samp{COFF}
7916@end enumerate
7917
7918@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
7919@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
7920Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
ff5dcc92 7921@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
252b5132
RH
7922
7923The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
7924same line, with no change in its effect.
7925
7926@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
7927@item LOAD @var{filename}
7928@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
7929Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
ff5dcc92 7930same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
7931command line.
7932
7933@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
7934@item NAME @var{output-name}
ff5dcc92 7935@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
252b5132
RH
7936MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
7937option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
7938
7939@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
7940@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
7941@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 7942Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
252b5132
RH
7943order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
7944script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
7945sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
7946file, in the order specified.
7947
7948@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
7949@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
7950@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
7951@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
7952Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
7953@var{name} used in the linker input files.
7954
7955@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
7956@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
7957@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
7958@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
7959You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
7960specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
7961If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
7962@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
7963@end table
7964
793c5807
NC
7965@node GNU Free Documentation License
7966@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
36f63dca 7967@include fdl.texi
704c465c 7968
370b66a1
CD
7969@node LD Index
7970@unnumbered LD Index
252b5132
RH
7971
7972@printindex cp
7973
7974@tex
7ca01ed9 7975% I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
252b5132
RH
7976% meantime:
7977\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
7978\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
7979\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
7980\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
7981\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
7982\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
7983\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
7984\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
7985\page\colophon
7ca01ed9 7986% Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
252b5132
RH
7987@end tex
7988
252b5132 7989@bye
This page took 1.149234 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.